1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
73 \default_output_format pdf2
75 \bibtex_command bibtex
76 \index_command default
80 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
81 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
85 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
86 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
87 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
92 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
93 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
96 \use_package amsmath 1
97 \use_package amssymb 1
100 \use_package mathdots 1
101 \use_package mathtools 0
102 \use_package mhchem 1
103 \use_package stackrel 0
104 \use_package stmaryrd 1
105 \use_package undertilde 0
107 \cite_engine_type default
111 \paperorientation portrait
115 \notefontcolor #0000ff
132 \paragraph_separation skip
134 \quotes_style english
138 \paperpagestyle default
139 \tracking_changes true
140 \output_changes false
144 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
145 \author 274215730 "scott"
146 \author 424524441 "rgheck"
157 by the \SpecialChar LyX
162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
164 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
165 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
166 Documentation mailing list:
167 \begin_inset CommandInset href
169 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
180 \begin_inset Newline newline
184 \begin_inset Newline newline
188 \begin_inset Note Note
191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
192 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
193 \begin_inset Newline newline
198 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
199 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
207 \begin_layout Standard
208 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
209 LatexCommand tableofcontents
216 \begin_layout Chapter
220 \begin_layout Section
221 What is \SpecialChar LyX
225 \begin_layout Standard
227 is a document preparation system.
228 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
229 scripts, publishable books, business
230 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
231 It is unlike most other
232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
239 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
241 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 pt type, left justified, 5
258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
267 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
271 \begin_layout Standard
272 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
277 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
281 \begin_layout Standard
286 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
287 's philosophy: most importantly,
288 the format of all of the manuals.
289 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
290 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
296 manual describes that, too.
299 \begin_layout Section
304 \begin_layout Standard
305 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
306 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
308 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
309 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
313 \begin_layout Standard
314 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
315 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
316 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
318 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
319 only a vertical scrollbar.
320 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
321 The first case is large images.
322 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
323 image and use the option
334 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
337 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
338 this doesn't work for equations yet.
341 \begin_layout Standard
342 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
343 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
351 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
358 \begin_layout Section
362 \begin_layout Standard
363 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
365 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
367 Just select the manual you want to read from the
374 \begin_layout Section
375 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
377 \begin_inset CommandInset label
379 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
386 \begin_layout Standard
387 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
388 can be configured via the menu
390 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
394 \begin_inset Index idx
397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
404 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
406 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
407 packages are available.
408 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
410 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
412 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
413 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
417 \begin_inset space \space{}
420 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
421 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
423 To force \SpecialChar LyX
424 to re-inspect your system, you should use
426 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
430 \begin_inset Index idx
433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
434 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
440 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
441 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
444 \begin_layout Section
447 \begin_inset CommandInset label
449 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
456 \begin_layout Standard
457 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
458 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
459 installed, but you will not be
460 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
461 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
462 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
463 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
464 document can always be output as plain text
468 \begin_layout Standard
469 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
470 or DocBook classes or packages.
471 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
472 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
475 \begin_layout Standard
476 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
477 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
478 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
481 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
489 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
490 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
493 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
497 \begin_inset Index idx
500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
501 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
509 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
516 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
520 \begin_layout Chapter
521 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
525 \begin_layout Section
526 Basic File Operations
527 \begin_inset Index idx
530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
539 \begin_layout Standard
544 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
545 in addition to some more advanced operations:
548 \begin_layout Itemize
570 \begin_layout Itemize
586 arg "buffer-new-template"
592 \begin_layout Itemize
614 \begin_layout Itemize
624 \begin_layout Itemize
638 \begin_layout Itemize
660 \begin_layout Itemize
672 arg "buffer-write-as"
678 \begin_layout Itemize
692 \begin_layout Itemize
706 \begin_layout Standard
707 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
708 a few minor differences.
711 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
722 command lists the available templates.
723 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
724 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
725 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
733 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
740 \begin_layout Standard
741 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
773 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
774 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
775 is just that — a big, blank space.
783 \begin_layout Standard
804 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
809 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
812 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
830 will reload the document from disk.
831 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
832 and want to restore it to the last save.
841 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
842 them as your changes.
845 \begin_layout Section
846 Basic Editing Features
847 \begin_inset Index idx
850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
859 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
866 \begin_layout Standard
867 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
868 can perform cut and paste operations
869 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
870 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
871 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
872 editing features and how to access
874 We will start with cut and paste.
877 \begin_layout Standard
878 As you might expect, the
882 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
883 various other editing features.
884 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
888 \begin_layout Itemize
894 \begin_inset Index idx
897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
926 \begin_layout Itemize
932 \begin_inset Index idx
935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
964 \begin_layout Itemize
970 \begin_inset Index idx
973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
998 \begin_layout Itemize
1002 \begin_inset space ~
1008 \begin_layout Itemize
1012 \begin_inset space ~
1018 \begin_layout Itemize
1022 \begin_inset space ~
1026 \begin_inset space ~
1032 \begin_inset Index idx
1035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1044 \begin_inset Index idx
1047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1062 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1072 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1078 \begin_layout Standard
1079 The first three are self-explanatory.
1080 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1081 and other programs by
1102 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1103 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1108 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1109 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1110 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1111 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1112 into individual cells.
1116 \begin_inset space ~
1121 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1122 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1126 \begin_layout Standard
1130 \begin_inset space ~
1135 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1137 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1139 \begin_inset space ~
1146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1152 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1153 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1154 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1156 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1160 \begin_inset space \space{}
1163 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1164 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1167 \begin_inset space ~
1170 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1172 \begin_inset space ~
1176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1180 \begin_inset space ~
1189 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1190 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1192 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1196 \begin_inset space ~
1201 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1202 start a new paragraph.
1203 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1204 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1209 \begin_inset space ~
1212 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1214 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1218 \begin_inset space ~
1226 \begin_inset space ~
1229 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1232 paste from the primary selection.
1233 This is normally the currently selected text.
1236 \begin_layout Standard
1239 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1241 \begin_inset space ~
1245 \begin_inset space ~
1253 \begin_inset space ~
1257 \begin_inset space ~
1263 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1269 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1272 \begin_inset space ~
1281 \begin_inset space ~
1286 button to skip the current word.
1290 \begin_inset space ~
1295 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1299 \begin_inset space ~
1304 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1306 If the toggle is set, searching for
1307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1318 will not match the word
1319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1333 Match whole words only
1335 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1336 to only find complete words, e.
1337 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1366 offers also an advanced
1369 \begin_inset space ~
1373 \begin_inset space ~
1378 feature that is described in section
1379 \begin_inset space ~
1383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1385 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1392 \begin_layout Standard
1393 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1394 \begin_inset space \space{}
1398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1406 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1408 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1413 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1420 \begin_layout Standard
1424 arg "inset-select-all"
1427 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1428 When the cursor is inside an inset
1431 arg "inset-select-all"
1434 selects the content of the inset.
1438 arg "inset-select-all"
1441 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1446 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1449 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1453 \begin_layout Section
1455 \begin_inset Index idx
1458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1465 \begin_inset Index idx
1468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1475 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1477 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1484 \begin_layout Standard
1485 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1487 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1490 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1493 or the toolbar button
1499 to undo some mistake.
1500 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1502 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1505 or the toolbar button
1512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1519 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1520 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1523 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1526 \begin_layout Standard
1527 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1536 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1537 This is a consequence of the 100
1538 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1541 step undo limit mentioned above.
1544 \begin_layout Standard
1553 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1555 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1559 \begin_layout Section
1561 \begin_inset Index idx
1564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1573 \begin_layout Standard
1574 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1577 \begin_layout Enumerate
1582 \begin_layout Itemize
1587 once anywhere in the edit window.
1588 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1592 \begin_layout Enumerate
1597 \begin_layout Itemize
1604 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1607 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1610 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1611 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1614 \begin_layout Itemize
1615 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1618 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1625 \begin_layout Enumerate
1626 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1630 \begin_layout Standard
1631 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1632 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1636 \begin_layout Section
1638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1640 name "sec:Navigating"
1645 \begin_inset Index idx
1648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1657 \begin_layout Standard
1659 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1662 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1668 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1671 \begin_layout Itemize
1672 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1674 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1676 \begin_inset space ~
1681 or by the toolbar button
1684 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1690 \begin_layout Itemize
1691 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1693 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1696 and use the same menu to return to them.
1697 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1700 \begin_layout Standard
1704 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1709 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1710 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1712 \begin_inset space ~
1717 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1718 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1719 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1720 your last editing position.
1723 \begin_layout Standard
1728 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1732 \begin_layout Subsection
1734 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1736 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1741 \begin_inset Index idx
1744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1745 Navigating ! Outline
1751 \begin_inset Index idx
1754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1763 \begin_layout Standard
1764 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1765 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1766 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1768 \begin_inset space ~
1772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1774 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1778 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1779 \begin_inset space ~
1783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1785 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1790 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1794 \begin_layout Standard
1795 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1796 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1797 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1798 dialog and to modify the citation.
1801 \begin_layout Standard
1802 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1804 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1805 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1813 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1816 \begin_layout Standard
1817 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1818 you further to control the display.
1823 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1824 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1830 option keeps it in the current view state.
1831 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1832 \begin_inset space ~
1835 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1836 \begin_inset space ~
1839 3, the subsections of sections
1840 \begin_inset space ~
1843 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1848 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1849 \begin_inset space ~
1853 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1863 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1866 \begin_layout Standard
1873 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1874 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1888 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1889 So, for example, you can move section
1890 \begin_inset space ~
1894 \begin_inset space ~
1897 2.4 or after section
1898 \begin_inset space ~
1903 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1916 (or the corresponding key bindings
1924 ) you can change the level of sections.
1925 So you can for example make section
1926 \begin_inset space ~
1930 \begin_inset space ~
1934 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_layout Standard
1941 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1942 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1945 \begin_layout Subsection
1946 Horizontal Scrolling
1947 \begin_inset Index idx
1950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1951 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1959 \begin_layout Standard
1961 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1967 \begin_inset space \space{}
1971 \begin_inset space ~
1974 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1975 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1976 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1980 \begin_layout Standard
1981 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1985 \begin_layout Itemize
1987 is used on a small tablet computer
1990 \begin_layout Itemize
1991 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
1995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2003 \begin_inset space ~
2016 \begin_layout Itemize
2017 Math constructs with long command names
2020 \begin_layout Standard
2021 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2022 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2024 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2025 windows so that table
2026 \begin_inset space ~
2030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2032 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2037 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2039 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2040 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2043 \begin_layout Standard
2044 \begin_inset Float table
2050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2051 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2054 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2056 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2060 Horizontal scrolling test.
2068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2070 \begin_inset Tabular
2071 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2072 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2073 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2074 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2075 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2117 \begin_layout Section
2118 Input/Word Completion
2119 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2121 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2126 \begin_inset Index idx
2129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2136 \begin_inset Index idx
2139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2170 \begin_layout Standard
2172 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2174 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2175 is used to propose completions.
2178 \begin_layout Standard
2179 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2182 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2187 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2194 \begin_inset space ~
2198 \begin_inset space ~
2203 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2207 \begin_inset space ~
2212 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2213 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2217 \begin_inset space ~
2223 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2224 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2225 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2226 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2229 \begin_layout Standard
2231 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2232 completions available.
2237 key to accept a proposed completion.
2238 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2239 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2240 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2247 \begin_layout Standard
2248 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2249 ing options for text.
2250 The special math option
2254 enables characters to be composed.
2255 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2256 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2259 , you can then input the characters
2260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2271 to a formula to get it.
2272 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2273 of the math toolbar.
2274 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2278 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2279 's installation folder.
2280 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2289 \begin_layout Section
2291 \begin_inset Index idx
2294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2301 \begin_inset Index idx
2304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2333 \begin_inset Index idx
2336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2367 \begin_layout Standard
2368 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2382 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2385 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2389 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2390 \begin_inset space ~
2394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2396 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2403 \begin_layout Standard
2407 \begin_inset space ~
2415 \begin_inset space ~
2436 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2440 \begin_layout Labeling
2441 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2445 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2446 LatexCommand nomenclature
2448 description "Tabulator key"
2454 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2456 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2457 \begin_inset space ~
2461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2463 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2470 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2474 , especially section
2475 \begin_inset space ~
2479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2481 reference "subsec:Lists"
2487 If you are still confused, look in the
2492 \begin_inset Newline newline
2500 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2501 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2505 \begin_layout Labeling
2506 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2510 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2511 LatexCommand nomenclature
2513 description "Escape key"
2520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2527 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2528 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2531 \begin_layout Labeling
2532 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2538 \begin_inset space ~
2542 \begin_inset space ~
2549 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2550 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2554 \begin_layout Standard
2555 There are three modifier keys:
2558 \begin_layout Labeling
2559 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2577 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2578 LatexCommand nomenclature
2580 description "Control key"
2584 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2585 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2589 \begin_layout Itemize
2598 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2601 \begin_layout Itemize
2610 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2613 \begin_layout Itemize
2622 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2626 \begin_layout Labeling
2627 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2645 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2646 LatexCommand nomenclature
2648 description "Shift key"
2652 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2653 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2656 \begin_layout Labeling
2657 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2675 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2676 LatexCommand nomenclature
2678 description "Alt or Meta key"
2682 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2683 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2684 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2690 \begin_inset Newline newline
2693 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2695 menu accelerator keys
2698 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2699 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2703 \begin_layout Standard
2704 For example, the sequence
2705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2711 \begin_inset space ~
2715 \begin_inset space ~
2721 \begin_inset space ~
2729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2748 \begin_inset space ~
2754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2764 \begin_layout Standard
2769 manual lists all other things bound to the
2777 \begin_layout Standard
2778 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2780 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2781 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2782 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2783 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2784 The \SpecialChar LyX
2785 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2786 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2787 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2789 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2805 followed by a capital
2812 \begin_layout Chapter
2815 \begin_inset Index idx
2818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2828 \begin_layout Section
2830 \begin_inset Index idx
2833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2842 \begin_layout Subsection
2846 \begin_layout Standard
2847 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2848 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2849 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2850 numbering schemes, and so on.
2851 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2852 and format the title of your document differently.
2855 \begin_layout Standard
2860 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2861 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2862 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2863 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2864 picks one for you by default.
2865 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2868 \begin_layout Subsection
2870 \begin_inset Index idx
2873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2882 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2889 \begin_layout Standard
2890 You can select a class using the
2892 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2893 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2897 \begin_inset Index idx
2900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2907 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2911 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2915 \begin_layout Standard
2916 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2921 \begin_layout Description
2922 Article for basic articles
2925 \begin_layout Description
2926 Report for basic reports
2929 \begin_layout Description
2930 Book for writing a book
2933 \begin_layout Description
2934 Letter for US-style letters
2937 \begin_layout Standard
2938 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2939 only uses if you have installed
2940 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2941 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2942 distributions will include
2944 Here are some of the classes.
2945 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2947 Special Document Classes
2956 \begin_layout Description
2957 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2960 \begin_layout Description
2961 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2965 \begin_layout Description
2966 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2970 \begin_layout Description
2971 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2972 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2973 There are three article layouts available.
2974 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2975 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2976 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2977 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2982 sequential numbering
2983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2986 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2987 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2988 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2989 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2992 \begin_layout Description
2993 Beamer Layout for presentations
2996 \begin_layout Description
2997 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2998 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2999 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3000 with \SpecialChar LyX
3004 \begin_layout Description
3005 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3008 \begin_layout Description
3010 \begin_inset space ~
3013 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3016 \begin_layout Description
3017 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3020 \begin_layout Description
3021 Foils Used to make transparencies
3024 \begin_layout Description
3025 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3026 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3027 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3028 with \SpecialChar LyX
3032 \begin_layout Description
3033 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3034 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3037 \begin_layout Description
3038 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3041 \begin_layout Description
3042 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3045 \begin_layout Description
3046 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3047 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3048 (Is used by this document.)
3051 \begin_layout Description
3052 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3055 \begin_layout Description
3056 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3059 \begin_layout Description
3064 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3065 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3067 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3071 \begin_layout Description
3072 Slides Used to make transparencies
3075 \begin_layout Description
3077 \begin_inset space ~
3080 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3081 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3084 \begin_layout Description
3085 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3088 \begin_layout Standard
3089 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3091 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3093 Special Document Classes
3100 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3101 of the document classes.
3104 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3108 \begin_layout Standard
3109 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3111 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3112 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3114 \begin_inset Index idx
3117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3134 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3135 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3137 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3140 \begin_layout Standard
3143 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3148 , are highly specialized.
3150 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3151 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3152 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3153 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3154 by some document class.
3155 There are just too many of them.
3156 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3159 \begin_layout Standard
3160 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3168 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3169 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3170 document class for a new file.
3172 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3175 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3182 manual for information on how to install them.
3183 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3189 \begin_layout Standard
3190 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3191 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3192 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3193 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3194 class files to be used for dissertation
3195 s submitted to those universities.
3196 The \SpecialChar LyX
3197 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3199 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3203 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3209 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3212 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3216 name "subsec:Modules"
3221 \begin_inset Index idx
3224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3233 \begin_layout Standard
3234 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3235 chosen document class.
3236 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3237 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3244 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3248 \begin_inset Index idx
3251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3258 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3262 \begin_layout Standard
3263 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3264 packages or file format converters that are not always
3265 installed by default.
3267 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3268 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3269 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3270 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3272 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3273 file without the missing prerequisites.
3274 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3275 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3278 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3282 \begin_inset Index idx
3285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3286 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3292 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3297 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3300 \begin_layout Standard
3301 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3309 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3311 will advise you about these things.
3319 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3321 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3323 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3328 \begin_inset Index idx
3331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3332 Document ! Local Layout
3340 \begin_layout Standard
3341 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3342 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3343 : They are intended to be used in
3344 a variety of different documents.
3345 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3346 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3347 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3348 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3349 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3351 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3369 manual for information on how to use it.
3372 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3376 \begin_layout Standard
3377 Each class has a default set of options.
3378 Here's a quick table describing them:
3381 \begin_layout Standard
3382 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3388 \begin_layout Standard
3390 \begin_inset Tabular
3391 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3392 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3393 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3394 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3395 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3396 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3397 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3851 \begin_layout Standard
3852 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3858 \begin_layout Standard
3859 You're probably also wondering what
3860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3864 \begin_inset space ~
3868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3872 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3873 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3878 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3883 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3893 headings, there are also
3901 headings, and so on.
3902 We will describe these headings fully in section
3903 \begin_inset space ~
3907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3909 reference "subsec:Headings"
3916 \begin_layout Subsection
3918 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3920 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3925 \begin_inset Index idx
3928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3935 \begin_inset Index idx
3938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3947 \begin_layout Standard
3948 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3950 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3957 \begin_inset space ~
3965 \begin_inset space ~
3970 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3972 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3973 doesn't support special options you want to
3974 use for your document.
3975 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3976 -class and its options, you have to read
3980 \begin_layout Standard
3984 \begin_inset space ~
3991 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3997 \begin_inset space ~
4002 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4003 You can choose between the following five options:
4006 \begin_layout Labeling
4007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4012 Use default page style of current class.
4015 \begin_layout Labeling
4016 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4021 No page numbers or headings.
4024 \begin_layout Labeling
4025 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4033 \begin_layout Labeling
4034 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4039 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4040 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4041 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4042 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4045 \begin_layout Labeling
4046 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4051 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4052 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4058 \begin_inset Index idx
4061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4063 -packages ! fancyhdr
4069 How they are defined is explained in section
4070 \begin_inset space ~
4074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4076 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4083 \begin_layout Standard
4084 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4085 \begin_inset space ~
4089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4091 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4098 \begin_layout Subsection
4099 Paper Size and Orientation
4100 \begin_inset Index idx
4103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4104 Document ! Paper size
4110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4112 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4119 \begin_layout Standard
4120 You can find the following options in the menu
4123 \begin_inset space ~
4130 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4134 \begin_inset Index idx
4137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4146 \begin_layout Labeling
4147 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4151 \begin_inset space ~
4156 What size paper to print on.
4161 \begin_layout Itemize
4167 \begin_layout Itemize
4173 \begin_layout Itemize
4179 \begin_layout Itemize
4185 \begin_layout Itemize
4188 US letter, US legal, US executive
4191 \begin_layout Itemize
4197 \begin_layout Itemize
4204 \begin_layout Labeling
4205 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4210 To choose whether to output as
4221 \begin_layout Labeling
4222 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4226 \begin_inset space ~
4231 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4232 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4235 \begin_layout Subsection
4237 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4239 name "subsec:Margins"
4244 \begin_inset Index idx
4247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4254 \begin_inset Index idx
4257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4266 \begin_layout Standard
4267 Paper margins are set in the menu
4269 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4273 \begin_inset Index idx
4276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4285 \begin_layout Standard
4286 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4287 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4288 the paper format and the font size into account.
4291 \begin_layout Subsection
4295 \begin_layout Standard
4296 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4302 That includes the paragraph environments.
4303 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4304 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4305 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4307 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4316 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4318 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4319 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4320 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4323 \begin_layout Section
4324 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4325 \begin_inset Index idx
4328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4329 Paragraph ! Indentation
4337 \begin_layout Subsection
4339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4341 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4348 \begin_layout Standard
4349 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4350 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4353 \begin_layout Standard
4354 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4355 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4356 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4357 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4361 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4367 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4368 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4369 language than English.
4371 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4374 \begin_layout Standard
4375 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4376 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4377 into \SpecialChar LyX
4379 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4382 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4384 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4385 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4386 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4393 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4394 goes to produce a printable file.
4399 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4401 gives you the ability globally to change
4405 these pre-coded spacings.
4406 We will explain more later.
4409 \begin_layout Subsection
4410 Paragraph Separation
4411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4413 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4418 \begin_inset Index idx
4421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4422 Paragraph ! Separation
4430 \begin_layout Standard
4438 \begin_inset space ~
4446 \begin_inset space ~
4453 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4457 \begin_inset Index idx
4460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4466 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4469 \begin_layout Subsection
4473 \begin_layout Standard
4474 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4477 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4479 \begin_inset space ~
4484 dialog and toggle the
4487 \begin_inset space ~
4492 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4495 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4499 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4500 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4504 \begin_layout Standard
4505 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4506 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4509 \begin_layout Subsection
4511 \begin_inset Index idx
4514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4515 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4523 \begin_layout Standard
4526 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4530 \begin_inset Index idx
4533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4542 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4546 \begin_inset space ~
4555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4556 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4562 \begin_inset Index idx
4565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4567 -packages ! setspace
4572 installed to use this feature.
4577 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4579 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4581 \begin_inset space ~
4586 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4587 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4590 \begin_layout Section
4591 Paragraph Environments
4592 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4594 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4599 \begin_inset Index idx
4602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4603 Paragraph ! Environments
4609 \begin_inset Index idx
4612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4613 Paragraph environments|(
4621 \begin_layout Subsection
4625 \begin_layout Standard
4626 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4629 \begin_layout Standard
4638 } \SpecialChar ldots
4648 \begin_inset Newline newline
4651 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4653 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4654 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4655 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4664 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4667 \begin_layout Standard
4668 A paragraph environment is simply a
4669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4676 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4677 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4678 scheme, labels, and so on.
4679 Additionally, you can
4680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4687 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4688 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4689 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4690 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4692 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4694 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4697 \begin_layout Standard
4698 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4699 \begin_inset Graphics
4700 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4706 at the left end of the toolbar.
4708 will change the environment of the
4712 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4713 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4714 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4718 \begin_layout Standard
4727 create a new paragraph using the
4731 paragraph environment.
4733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4740 because if you are in one of these environments:
4743 \begin_layout Itemize
4749 \begin_layout Itemize
4755 \begin_layout Itemize
4761 \begin_layout Itemize
4767 \begin_layout Itemize
4773 \begin_layout Itemize
4779 \begin_layout Itemize
4785 \begin_layout Standard
4787 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4791 , rather than resetting it to
4796 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4797 \begin_inset space ~
4801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4803 reference "sec:Nesting"
4810 \begin_layout Subsection
4814 \begin_layout Standard
4815 The default paragraph environment is
4820 It creates a plain paragraph.
4822 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4823 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4824 this manual) are in the
4831 \begin_layout Standard
4832 You can nest a paragraph using the
4836 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4844 \begin_layout Subsection
4846 \begin_inset Index idx
4849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4858 \begin_layout Standard
4859 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4860 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4869 for thanks or contact information.
4870 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4871 places all of this on a separate page
4872 along with today's date.
4873 For other types of documents, the title
4874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4881 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4885 \begin_layout Standard
4887 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4901 Here's how you use them:
4904 \begin_layout Itemize
4905 Put the title of your document in the
4912 \begin_layout Itemize
4913 Put the author name in the
4920 \begin_layout Itemize
4921 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4922 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4928 Note that using this environment is optional.
4929 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4930 will automatically insert today's date.
4931 If you don't want a date, use the option
4933 Suppress default date on front page
4937 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4938 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4940 \begin_inset space ~
4948 \begin_layout Standard
4949 You can use footnotes to insert
4950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4957 or contact information.
4960 \begin_layout Subsection
4962 \begin_inset Index idx
4965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4972 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4974 name "subsec:Headings"
4981 \begin_layout Standard
4982 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4984 takes care of the numbering for you.
4987 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4989 \begin_inset Index idx
4992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4993 Section headings ! Numbered
5001 \begin_layout Standard
5002 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5006 \begin_layout Enumerate
5012 \begin_layout Enumerate
5018 \begin_layout Enumerate
5024 \begin_layout Enumerate
5030 \begin_layout Enumerate
5036 \begin_layout Enumerate
5042 \begin_layout Enumerate
5048 \begin_layout Standard
5050 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5051 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5052 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5055 \begin_layout Standard
5056 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5057 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5058 You group the book into chapters.
5060 does a similar grouping:
5063 \begin_layout Itemize
5068 is divided into either
5079 \begin_layout Itemize
5091 \begin_layout Itemize
5103 \begin_layout Itemize
5115 \begin_layout Itemize
5127 \begin_layout Itemize
5139 \begin_layout Standard
5140 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5148 Not all document types use the
5152 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5157 is the top-level heading.
5165 \begin_layout Standard
5170 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5171 labels it with its number,
5172 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5174 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5188 \begin_inset Index idx
5191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5192 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5200 \begin_layout Standard
5201 The unnumbered section headings have a
5202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5209 at the end of their name.
5210 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5211 the table of contents, see section
5212 \begin_inset space ~
5216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5225 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5226 Changing the Numbering
5227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5229 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5236 \begin_layout Standard
5237 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5238 in the Table of Contents.
5239 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5241 Just as certain classes start with
5255 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5265 This is something you can change.
5268 \begin_layout Standard
5271 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5275 \begin_inset Index idx
5278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5287 \begin_inset space ~
5291 \begin_inset space ~
5296 you will see two counters.
5301 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5302 numbers a section heading.
5303 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5307 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5308 Short Titles of Headings
5309 \begin_inset Index idx
5312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5313 Section headings ! Short titles
5319 \begin_inset Argument 1
5322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5331 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5338 \begin_layout Standard
5339 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5340 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5341 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5342 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5345 \begin_layout Standard
5347 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5348 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5349 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5350 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5353 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5355 \begin_inset space ~
5361 This will insert a box labeled
5362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5366 \begin_inset space ~
5370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5373 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5374 This also works for captions inside floats.
5375 There can only be one short title per title.
5378 \begin_layout Standard
5379 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5382 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5386 \begin_layout Standard
5387 The following information applies to all section headings:
5390 \begin_layout Itemize
5391 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5394 \begin_layout Itemize
5395 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5398 \begin_layout Itemize
5399 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5402 \begin_layout Itemize
5403 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5406 \begin_layout Subsection
5410 \begin_layout Standard
5412 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5426 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5427 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5428 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5429 the text they contain.
5430 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5438 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5441 \begin_layout Standard
5442 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5451 when you start a new paragraph.
5452 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5456 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5457 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5458 have to change back to the
5462 environment yourself.
5465 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5467 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5474 \begin_inset Index idx
5477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5486 \begin_layout Standard
5487 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5488 time for the differences.
5497 are identical except for one difference:
5501 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5510 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5513 \begin_layout Standard
5514 Here's an example of the
5527 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5529 See – no indentation!
5533 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5534 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5535 the other paragraph.
5538 \begin_layout Standard
5539 Here's another example, this time in the
5546 \begin_layout Quotation
5552 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5553 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5554 the first line, then
5558 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5562 you were quoting other text.
5565 \begin_layout Quotation
5566 Here's a new paragraph.
5567 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5568 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5571 \begin_layout Standard
5572 As the examples show,
5576 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5577 They should put quotes in the
5582 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5586 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5589 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5591 \begin_inset Index idx
5594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5601 \begin_inset Index idx
5604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5620 \begin_layout Standard
5625 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5631 \begin_inset Newline newline
5634 Which I did not rehearse!
5638 It could be much worse.
5639 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5641 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5642 indented a bit more than the first.
5643 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5649 \begin_inset Newline newline
5652 And make things look fine
5653 \begin_inset Newline newline
5659 arg "newline-insert newline"
5665 \begin_layout Standard
5670 does not indent both margins.
5671 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5672 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5675 arg "newline-insert newline"
5681 \begin_layout Subsection
5683 \begin_inset Index idx
5686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5693 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5702 \begin_layout Standard
5704 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5714 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5715 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5724 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5725 lets you provide your own label.
5726 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5727 describing some general features of all four of them.
5730 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5734 \begin_layout Standard
5735 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5737 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5738 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5747 reset the environment to
5751 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5752 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5753 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5757 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5761 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5768 \begin_layout Standard
5769 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5770 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5771 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5773 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5774 you read all of section
5775 \begin_inset space ~
5779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5781 reference "sec:Nesting"
5788 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5790 \begin_inset Index idx
5793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5800 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5809 \begin_layout Standard
5810 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5814 paragraph environment.
5815 It has the following properties:
5818 \begin_layout Itemize
5819 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5823 \begin_layout Itemize
5825 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5828 \begin_layout Itemize
5829 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5833 \begin_layout Itemize
5834 The items can have any length.
5836 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5837 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5844 \begin_layout Itemize
5849 environment inside another
5853 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5857 \begin_layout Itemize
5858 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5861 \begin_layout Itemize
5863 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5866 \begin_layout Itemize
5868 \begin_inset space ~
5872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5874 reference "sec:Nesting"
5878 for a full explanation of nesting.
5882 \begin_layout Standard
5883 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5892 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5895 \begin_layout Standard
5896 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5897 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5900 \begin_layout Itemize
5901 The label for the first level
5905 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5909 \begin_layout Itemize
5910 The label for the second level is a dash.
5914 \begin_layout Itemize
5915 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5919 \begin_layout Itemize
5920 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5924 \begin_layout Itemize
5925 Back out to the third level.
5929 \begin_layout Itemize
5930 Back to the second level.
5934 \begin_layout Itemize
5935 Back to the outermost level.
5938 \begin_layout Standard
5939 These are the default labels for an
5944 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5946 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5949 dialog in the submenu
5954 \begin_inset Index idx
5957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5963 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5967 \begin_layout Standard
5968 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5969 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5971 \begin_inset space ~
5975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5977 reference "sec:Nesting"
5984 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5986 \begin_inset Index idx
5989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5996 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5998 name "sec:Enumerate"
6005 \begin_layout Standard
6010 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6011 It has these properties:
6014 \begin_layout Enumerate
6015 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6019 \begin_layout Enumerate
6020 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6024 \begin_layout Enumerate
6026 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6029 \begin_layout Enumerate
6034 environment resets the counter to one.
6037 \begin_layout Enumerate
6050 \begin_layout Enumerate
6051 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6052 Items can have any length.
6055 \begin_layout Enumerate
6056 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6059 \begin_layout Enumerate
6060 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6063 \begin_layout Enumerate
6064 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6068 \begin_layout Standard
6077 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6079 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6080 labels the four different levels in an
6087 \begin_layout Enumerate
6088 The first level of an
6092 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6096 \begin_layout Enumerate
6097 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6101 \begin_layout Enumerate
6102 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6106 \begin_layout Enumerate
6107 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6110 \begin_layout Enumerate
6111 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6116 \begin_layout Enumerate
6117 Back to the third level
6121 \begin_layout Enumerate
6122 Back to the second level.
6126 \begin_layout Enumerate
6127 Back to the outermost level.
6130 \begin_layout Standard
6131 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6135 environment, see section
6136 \begin_inset space ~
6140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6142 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6147 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6151 \begin_layout Standard
6152 There is more to nesting
6156 environments than we've stated here.
6157 You should read section
6158 \begin_inset space ~
6162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6164 reference "sec:Nesting"
6168 to learn more about nesting.
6171 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6173 \begin_inset Index idx
6176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6185 \begin_layout Standard
6186 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6190 list has no fixed label.
6191 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6200 of the first line as the label.
6204 \begin_layout Description
6205 Example: This is an example of the
6212 \begin_layout Standard
6214 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6218 \begin_layout Standard
6220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6227 it is meant that the first usage of the
6231 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6233 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6241 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6246 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6247 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6249 \begin_inset space ~
6255 \begin_inset space ~
6259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6261 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6265 for more information.) Here is an example:
6268 \begin_layout Description
6270 \begin_inset space ~
6273 Example: This one shows how to use a
6276 \begin_inset space ~
6288 \begin_layout Description
6289 Usage: You should use the
6293 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6294 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6296 It's not a good idea to use a
6300 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6301 You're better off using
6313 paragraphs into them.
6316 \begin_layout Description
6317 Nesting: You can nest
6321 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6325 \begin_layout Standard
6326 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6327 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6328 them from the first line.
6331 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6333 \begin_inset Index idx
6336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6345 \begin_layout Standard
6350 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6351 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6355 \begin_layout Standard
6364 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6366 Here are its properties:
6369 \begin_layout Labeling
6370 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6372 \begin_inset space ~
6375 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6384 of each line as the item label.
6389 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6390 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6391 space as described above.
6394 \begin_layout Labeling
6395 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6396 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6397 uses different margins for the item label and the
6398 body of the item text.
6399 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6400 label width plus a little extra space.
6404 \begin_layout Labeling
6405 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6407 \begin_inset space ~
6410 width \SpecialChar LyX
6411 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6412 If the label width is larger, the label
6413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6420 into the first line.
6421 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6422 margin of the rest of the item text.
6425 \begin_layout Labeling
6426 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6428 \begin_inset space ~
6431 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6436 environment has the same left margin.
6437 \begin_inset Newline newline
6440 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6443 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6445 \begin_inset space ~
6450 dialog (toolbar button
6453 arg "layout-paragraph"
6460 \begin_inset space ~
6465 determines the default label width.
6466 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6475 multiple times instead.
6476 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6486 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6489 \begin_inset space ~
6494 every time you alter a label in a
6499 \begin_inset Newline newline
6502 The predefined default width is the length of
6503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6511 \begin_inset space ~
6517 \begin_layout Standard
6522 list the same way as the
6526 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6532 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6536 \begin_layout Standard
6541 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6542 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6544 \begin_inset space ~
6548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6550 reference "sec:Nesting"
6554 to learn about nesting.
6557 \begin_layout Standard
6558 There is yet another feature of the
6562 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6563 left-justifies the item labels by
6565 You can use additional
6569 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6570 justifies the item label.
6575 are documented in section
6576 \begin_inset space ~
6580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6582 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6587 Here are some examples:
6590 \begin_layout Labeling
6591 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6592 Left The default for
6599 \begin_layout Labeling
6600 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6601 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6608 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6611 \begin_layout Labeling
6612 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6613 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6617 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6624 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6627 \begin_layout Subsection
6629 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6631 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6636 \begin_inset Index idx
6639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6648 \begin_layout Standard
6649 The features described in this section require that the module
6651 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6653 is loaded in the document settings.
6654 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6660 \begin_inset Index idx
6663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6665 -packages ! enumitem
6673 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6674 Custom Enumerate Lists
6675 \begin_inset Index idx
6678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6679 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6687 \begin_layout Standard
6689 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6692 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6695 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6696 There you add the command
6699 \begin_layout Standard
6707 \begin_layout Standard
6719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6720 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6721 Code, look at section
6722 \begin_inset space ~
6726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6728 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6741 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6748 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6749 For capital Roman numerals replace
6761 in the command above.
6762 For Arabic numerals use
6770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6777 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6792 \begin_layout Standard
6794 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6802 You can only number 26
6803 \begin_inset space ~
6806 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6814 \begin_layout Standard
6815 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6816 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6819 \begin_layout Standard
6820 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6823 \begin_layout Enumerate
6824 \begin_inset Argument 1
6827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6853 \begin_layout Enumerate
6854 \begin_inset Argument 1
6857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6880 \begin_layout Enumerate
6885 \begin_layout Enumerate
6886 \begin_inset Argument 1
6889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6913 \begin_layout Enumerate
6914 \begin_inset Argument 1
6917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6943 \begin_layout Standard
6944 For this list these commands were used:
6947 \begin_layout Standard
6958 \begin_inset Newline newline
6966 \begin_inset Newline newline
6974 \begin_inset Newline newline
6984 \begin_layout Standard
6991 makes the label emphasized and
7000 \begin_layout Standard
7001 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7009 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7010 lists until you change the definition.
7018 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7020 \begin_inset Index idx
7023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7024 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7032 \begin_layout Standard
7033 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7036 \begin_layout Enumerate
7037 \begin_inset Argument 1
7040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7059 \begin_inset Note Note
7062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7063 goes back to default numbering
7071 \begin_layout Enumerate
7075 \begin_layout Standard
7079 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7083 \begin_layout Standard
7084 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7089 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7090 to indicate that it is a resumed
7091 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7092 , but in the output.
7095 \begin_layout Standard
7096 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7104 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7113 \begin_layout Standard
7114 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7116 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7117 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7118 of a normal enumeration.
7119 There, insert the command
7122 \begin_layout Standard
7128 \begin_layout Standard
7133 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7137 \begin_layout Enumerate
7141 \begin_layout Enumerate
7145 \begin_layout Standard
7146 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7149 \begin_layout Enumerate
7150 \begin_inset Argument 1
7153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7169 This enumeration starts at 4
7172 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7174 \begin_inset Index idx
7177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7186 \begin_layout Standard
7187 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7189 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7192 \begin_layout Itemize
7196 \begin_layout Itemize
7197 with standard spacing
7200 \begin_layout Standard
7201 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7203 Add there the command
7207 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7210 \begin_layout Itemize
7211 \begin_inset Argument 1
7214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7233 \begin_layout Itemize
7237 \begin_layout Itemize
7241 \begin_layout Standard
7242 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7249 \begin_inset Index idx
7252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7254 -packages ! enumitem
7260 For more information see its documentation,
7261 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7270 \begin_layout Standard
7271 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7273 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7274 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7278 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7281 \begin_layout Enumerate
7282 \begin_inset Argument 1
7285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7293 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7306 \begin_layout Enumerate
7307 with negative indentation
7310 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7311 Further Customization
7312 \begin_inset Index idx
7315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7316 Lists ! Customization
7324 \begin_layout Standard
7325 You can also change the style of description lists.
7329 \begin_layout Standard
7335 \begin_layout Standard
7336 changes the description label font, the command
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7345 \begin_layout Standard
7346 sets the list style.
7349 \begin_layout Standard
7350 An example where the command
7353 \begin_layout Standard
7358 itshape, style=nextline
7361 \begin_layout Standard
7365 \begin_layout Description
7367 \begin_inset space ~
7371 \begin_inset Argument 1
7374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7380 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7382 itshape, style=nextline
7392 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7393 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7397 \begin_layout Description
7399 \begin_inset space ~
7402 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7403 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7404 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7407 \begin_layout Standard
7408 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7414 \begin_inset Index idx
7417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7419 -packages ! enumitem
7425 For more information see its documentation
7426 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7435 \begin_layout Subsection
7437 \begin_inset Index idx
7440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7449 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7451 \begin_inset space ~
7454 Address: An Overview
7457 \begin_layout Standard
7458 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7459 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7467 \begin_inset space ~
7473 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7474 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7475 gags on the document.
7476 In contrast, you can use the
7483 \begin_inset space ~
7488 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7489 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7493 \begin_layout Standard
7494 Of course, you're not limited to using
7501 \begin_inset space ~
7510 \begin_inset space ~
7515 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7516 some European academic papers.
7519 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7521 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7523 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7530 \begin_layout Standard
7535 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7536 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7540 \begin_inset space ~
7545 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7546 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7547 Here's an example of each:
7550 \begin_layout Right Address
7552 \begin_inset Newline newline
7556 \begin_inset Newline newline
7560 \begin_inset Newline newline
7563 When is it? What is today?
7566 \begin_layout Standard
7570 \begin_inset space ~
7576 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7578 the largest block of text on a single line.
7579 Here's an example of the
7586 \begin_layout Address
7588 \begin_inset Newline newline
7591 Where do I send this
7592 \begin_inset Newline newline
7595 Your post office and country
7598 \begin_layout Standard
7599 As you can see, both
7606 \begin_inset space ~
7611 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7616 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7617 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7623 This makes sense, since
7631 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7632 Thus, you have to use
7639 arg "newline-insert newline"
7644 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7645 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7647 \begin_inset space ~
7651 \begin_inset space ~
7656 ) to start a new line in an
7663 \begin_inset space ~
7671 \begin_layout Subsection
7675 \begin_layout Standard
7676 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7677 or list of references.
7679 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7682 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7684 \begin_inset Index idx
7687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7696 \begin_layout Standard
7701 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7702 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7703 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7704 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7718 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7719 The book document classes ignores the
7723 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7727 in a letter document class.
7730 \begin_layout Standard
7735 environment does several things for you.
7736 First, it puts the centered label
7737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7745 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7747 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7748 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7749 the subsequent text.
7750 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7752 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7756 \begin_layout Standard
7757 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7761 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7762 The new paragraph will still be in the
7767 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7768 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7771 \begin_layout Standard
7772 \begin_inset Float figure
7777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7779 \begin_inset Graphics
7780 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7788 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7791 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7793 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7814 \begin_layout Standard
7815 We would love to demonstrate the
7819 environment, but since this document is in the
7820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7827 class, we can't do this.
7828 We inserted it therefore as figure
7829 \begin_inset space ~
7833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7835 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7840 If you have never heard of an
7841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7848 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7851 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7853 \begin_inset Index idx
7856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7865 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7872 \begin_layout Standard
7877 environment is used to list references.
7878 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7879 only use it at the end of the document.
7891 \begin_layout Standard
7892 When you first open a
7896 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7897 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7913 depending on the document class.
7914 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7915 Each paragraph of the
7919 environment is a bibliography entry.
7924 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7925 Each new paragraph is still in the
7932 \begin_layout Standard
7933 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7934 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7936 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7938 handling, have a look at section
7939 \begin_inset space ~
7943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7945 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7952 \begin_layout Subsection
7953 Special Environments
7956 \begin_layout Standard
7958 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7959 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7962 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7967 \begin_inset Index idx
7970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7978 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7980 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7987 \begin_layout Standard
7993 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7995 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8000 key as a fixed whitespace.
8004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8017 \begin_inset space ~
8022 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8040 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8043 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8046 arg "newline-insert newline"
8063 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8064 So, when you finish using the
8069 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8070 Also, you can nest the
8075 environment inside of others.
8078 \begin_layout Standard
8079 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8082 \begin_layout Itemize
8086 arg "newline-insert newline"
8089 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8090 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8094 \begin_inset space \space{}
8104 arg "newline-insert newline"
8110 \begin_layout Itemize
8114 arg "newline-insert newline"
8124 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8130 \begin_layout Itemize
8131 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8132 You must put at least one
8136 in any line you want blank.
8137 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8141 \begin_layout Itemize
8142 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8146 since that will insert
8151 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8154 arg "self-insert \""
8160 \begin_layout Standard
8164 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8168 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8172 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8176 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8180 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8181 printf("Hello World!
8186 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8190 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8194 \begin_layout Standard
8195 This is just the standard
8196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8207 \begin_layout Standard
8213 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8215 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8216 as if you used a typewriter.
8217 \begin_inset Index idx
8220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8221 Paragraph environments|)
8226 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8229 Program Code Listings
8234 \begin_inset space ~
8242 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8246 \begin_inset Index idx
8249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8258 \begin_layout Standard
8263 environment is similar to the
8268 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8269 computer console text.
8274 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8288 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8289 you can have empty lines.
8302 \begin_layout Itemize
8303 have a certain language and a text style
8306 \begin_layout Itemize
8307 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8308 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8309 and \SpecialChar TeX
8313 \begin_layout Standard
8314 Because of these properties
8318 works like a typewriter.
8322 \begin_layout Verbatim
8327 \begin_layout Verbatim
8331 The following 2 lines are empty:
8334 \begin_layout Verbatim
8338 \begin_layout Verbatim
8342 \begin_layout Verbatim
8344 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8349 \begin_layout Standard
8354 environment is identical to
8358 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8359 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8366 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8371 \begin_layout Section
8372 Nesting Environments
8373 \begin_inset Index idx
8376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8377 Nesting ! Environments
8383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8392 \begin_layout Subsection
8396 \begin_layout Standard
8398 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8400 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8402 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8404 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8416 \begin_layout Enumerate
8420 \begin_layout Enumerate
8425 \begin_layout Enumerate
8429 \begin_layout Enumerate
8434 \begin_layout Enumerate
8438 \begin_layout Standard
8439 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8440 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8442 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8444 \begin_inset space ~
8448 \begin_inset space ~
8456 \begin_inset space ~
8460 \begin_inset space ~
8465 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8467 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8470 arg "depth-increment"
8476 arg "depth-decrement"
8490 arg "depth-increment"
8496 arg "depth-decrement"
8500 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8501 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8505 \begin_layout Standard
8506 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8507 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8508 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8509 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8510 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8513 \begin_layout Standard
8514 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8516 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8518 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8521 \begin_layout Subsection
8522 What You Can and Can't Nest
8525 \begin_layout Standard
8526 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8527 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8530 \begin_layout Standard
8531 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8532 than a simple yes or no.
8533 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8536 \begin_layout Itemize
8537 Completely unnestable
8540 \begin_layout Itemize
8541 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8545 \begin_layout Itemize
8546 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8550 \begin_layout Standard
8551 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8552 environments have them:
8555 \begin_layout Description
8556 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8557 Can't nest into them.
8561 \begin_layout Itemize
8567 \begin_layout Itemize
8573 \begin_layout Itemize
8579 \begin_layout Itemize
8585 \begin_layout Itemize
8592 \begin_layout Description
8594 \begin_inset space ~
8597 Nestable You can nest them.
8598 You can nest other things into them.
8602 \begin_layout Itemize
8608 \begin_layout Itemize
8614 \begin_layout Itemize
8620 \begin_layout Itemize
8626 \begin_layout Itemize
8632 \begin_layout Itemize
8638 \begin_layout Itemize
8644 \begin_layout Itemize
8651 \begin_layout Itemize
8657 \begin_layout Itemize
8664 \begin_layout Description
8665 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8666 You can't nest anything into them.
8670 \begin_layout Itemize
8676 \begin_layout Itemize
8682 \begin_layout Itemize
8688 \begin_layout Itemize
8694 \begin_layout Itemize
8700 \begin_layout Itemize
8706 \begin_layout Itemize
8712 \begin_layout Itemize
8718 \begin_layout Itemize
8724 \begin_layout Itemize
8730 \begin_layout Itemize
8736 \begin_layout Itemize
8742 \begin_layout Itemize
8748 \begin_layout Itemize
8752 \begin_inset space ~
8758 \begin_layout Itemize
8765 \begin_layout Standard
8766 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8774 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8784 \begin_inset space ~
8787 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8788 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8789 nested section headings violate this.
8797 \begin_layout Subsection
8798 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8799 \begin_inset Index idx
8802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8803 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8811 \begin_layout Standard
8812 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8813 affected by nesting anyhow.
8817 \begin_layout Itemize
8821 \begin_layout Itemize
8825 \begin_layout Itemize
8829 \begin_layout Standard
8831 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8839 Figures and tables in
8843 are not affected by this.
8848 Have a look at section
8849 \begin_inset space ~
8853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8855 reference "sec:Floats"
8859 for more information about
8866 \begin_layout Standard
8868 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8869 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8873 \begin_layout Standard
8874 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8882 of its own, it behaves just like a
8883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8890 paragraph environment.
8891 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8895 \begin_layout Standard
8896 Here's an example with a table:
8899 \begin_layout Enumerate
8904 \begin_layout Enumerate
8905 This is (a) and it's nested.
8909 \begin_layout Standard
8910 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8916 \begin_layout Standard
8918 \begin_inset Tabular
8919 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8920 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8921 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8922 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9006 \begin_layout Standard
9007 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9014 \begin_layout Enumerate
9016 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9020 \begin_layout Enumerate
9024 \begin_layout Standard
9025 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9028 \begin_layout Enumerate
9033 \begin_layout Enumerate
9034 This is (a) and it's nested.
9038 \begin_layout Standard
9039 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9045 \begin_layout Standard
9047 \begin_inset Tabular
9048 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9049 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9050 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9051 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9135 \begin_layout Standard
9136 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9142 \begin_layout Enumerate
9149 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9152 \begin_layout Enumerate
9156 \begin_layout Standard
9157 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9161 \begin_layout Standard
9162 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9165 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9168 \begin_layout Enumerate
9173 \begin_layout Enumerate
9174 This is (a) and it's nested.
9177 \begin_layout Standard
9178 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9184 \begin_layout Standard
9186 \begin_inset Tabular
9187 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9188 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9189 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9190 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9275 \begin_layout Standard
9276 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9282 \begin_layout Enumerate
9284 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9291 \begin_layout Enumerate
9295 \begin_layout Standard
9296 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9302 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9303 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9307 \begin_layout Subsection
9308 Usage and General Features
9311 \begin_layout Standard
9312 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9313 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9322 is the innermost possible depth.
9323 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9326 \begin_layout Enumerate
9327 level #1 – outermost
9331 \begin_layout Enumerate
9336 \begin_layout Enumerate
9341 \begin_layout Enumerate
9346 \begin_layout Itemize
9351 \begin_layout Itemize
9360 \begin_layout Standard
9361 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9362 both of them in the example.
9363 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9373 For example, if we tried to nest another
9378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9385 , we would get errors.
9388 \begin_layout Subsection
9390 \begin_inset Index idx
9393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9402 \begin_layout Standard
9403 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9404 We have several examples of nested environments.
9405 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9409 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9410 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9413 \begin_layout Labeling
9414 \labelwidthstring MMM
9415 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9424 \begin_layout Labeling
9425 \labelwidthstring MMM
9426 #2-a This is level #2.
9427 We created it by using
9430 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9436 arg "depth-increment"
9443 \begin_layout Labeling
9444 \labelwidthstring MMM
9445 #3-a This is level #3.
9446 This time, we just enter
9453 arg "depth-increment"
9457 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9461 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9467 arg "depth-increment"
9474 \begin_layout Standard
9479 environment, nested inside of
9480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9488 So, it's at level #4.
9489 We did this by entering
9492 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9498 arg "depth-increment"
9501 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9506 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9522 \begin_layout Standard
9527 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9530 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9536 \begin_layout Labeling
9537 \labelwidthstring MMM
9538 #4-a This is level #4.
9542 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9545 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9550 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9554 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9559 keep nesting things inside
9560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9571 \begin_layout Labeling
9572 \labelwidthstring MMM
9573 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9578 \begin_layout Labeling
9579 \labelwidthstring MMM
9580 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9581 and this is level #6.
9582 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9586 \begin_layout Labeling
9587 \labelwidthstring MMM
9588 #5-b Back to level #5.
9592 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9598 arg "depth-decrement"
9605 \begin_layout Labeling
9606 \labelwidthstring MMM
9610 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9616 arg "depth-decrement"
9619 , we're back at level #4.
9623 \begin_layout Labeling
9624 \labelwidthstring MMM
9625 #3-b Back to level #3.
9626 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9630 \begin_layout Labeling
9631 \labelwidthstring MMM
9632 #2-b Back to level #2.
9637 \begin_layout Labeling
9638 \labelwidthstring MMM
9639 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9640 After this sentence, we will enter
9644 and change the paragraph environment back to
9651 \begin_layout Standard
9652 We could have also used the
9668 environment in place of the
9673 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9676 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9677 Example 2: Inheritance
9680 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9681 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9684 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9693 arg "depth-increment"
9697 \begin_inset Newline newline
9700 which, we will change to the
9708 \begin_layout Enumerate
9713 environment, at level #2.
9716 \begin_layout Enumerate
9717 Notice how the nested
9721 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9725 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9729 \begin_layout Standard
9730 We ended this example by entering
9735 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9739 and reset the nesting depth by using
9742 arg "depth-decrement"
9748 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9749 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9758 \begin_inset Argument 1
9761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9762 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9770 \begin_layout Enumerate
9771 This is level #1, in an
9775 paragraph environment.
9776 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9780 \begin_layout Enumerate
9785 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9791 arg "depth-increment"
9795 Now, what happens if we nest an
9799 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9800 label be? An asterisk?
9804 \begin_layout Itemize
9814 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9815 So, its label is a bullet.
9816 (We got here by using
9819 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9825 arg "depth-increment"
9828 , then changing the environment to
9836 \begin_layout Itemize
9837 Here's level #4, produced using
9840 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9846 arg "depth-increment"
9850 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9855 \begin_layout Enumerate
9858 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9863 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9867 , because we are in the
9875 environment (that is, it is an
9890 \begin_layout Enumerate
9895 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9896 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9900 \begin_layout Enumerate
9901 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9904 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9907 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9910 \begin_layout Enumerate
9914 arg "depth-decrement"
9917 to decrease the depth after the next
9920 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9927 \begin_layout Enumerate
9929 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9934 \begin_layout Enumerate
9936 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9937 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9941 \begin_layout Enumerate
9942 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9951 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9956 reset the counter for the label.
9960 \begin_layout Enumerate
9964 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9970 arg "depth-decrement"
9973 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9974 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9975 into the twofold-nested
9983 \begin_layout Enumerate
9984 The same thing happens if we do another
9987 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9993 arg "depth-decrement"
9996 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9999 \begin_layout Standard
10000 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10005 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10016 The number of other
10020 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10027 The same rule applies for the
10031 environment, as well.
10034 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10035 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10038 \begin_layout Enumerate
10039 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10040 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10041 the same detail with how we did it.
10050 \begin_layout Standard
10058 arg "depth-increment"
10065 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10066 the example in parentheses someplace.
10067 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10068 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10069 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10073 \begin_layout Enumerate
10078 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10082 \begin_layout Verse
10083 Now we will add verse.
10084 \begin_inset Newline newline
10087 It will get much worse.
10088 \begin_inset Newline newline
10098 arg "depth-increment"
10108 \begin_layout Verse
10109 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10110 \begin_inset Newline newline
10113 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10114 \begin_inset Newline newline
10120 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10128 \begin_layout Verse
10129 Here comes a table:
10133 \begin_layout Standard
10134 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10140 \begin_layout Standard
10142 \begin_inset Tabular
10143 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10144 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10145 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10146 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10231 \begin_layout Verse
10235 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10245 arg "depth-increment"
10251 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10257 \begin_inset Newline newline
10265 arg "depth-decrement"
10272 \begin_layout Enumerate
10277 : level #1) This is another item.
10278 Note that selecting a
10282 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10283 3 times to put the table inside the
10291 \begin_layout Quotation
10292 We're now ending the
10296 list and changing to
10301 We're still at level #1.
10302 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10303 The next set of paragraphs is a
10304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10311 We will nest both the
10318 \begin_inset space ~
10323 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10327 for the letter body.
10331 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10334 to preserve the depth.
10335 Remember that you need to use
10338 arg "newline-insert newline"
10341 to create multiple lines inside the
10348 \begin_inset space ~
10358 \begin_layout Right Address
10360 \begin_inset Newline newline
10363 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10364 \begin_inset Newline newline
10370 \begin_layout Address
10372 \begin_inset space ~
10378 \begin_layout Quotation
10379 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10380 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10383 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10384 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10385 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10386 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10387 as soon as possible.
10388 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10391 \begin_layout Quotation
10392 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10393 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10394 with your order, along with payment.
10397 \begin_layout Quotation
10398 We thank you again for your patience.
10401 \begin_layout Address
10403 \begin_inset Newline newline
10410 \begin_layout Quotation
10411 That ends that example!
10414 \begin_layout Standard
10415 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10416 gives you a lot of power with just
10418 We could have easily nested an
10439 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10442 \begin_layout Subsection
10444 \begin_inset Index idx
10447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10448 Nesting ! Separation
10454 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10456 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10463 \begin_layout Standard
10464 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10466 For example you need two different enumerations:
10469 \begin_layout Enumerate
10474 \begin_layout Enumerate
10479 \begin_layout Enumerate
10483 \begin_layout Standard
10484 \begin_inset Separator plain
10490 \begin_layout Itemize
10496 \begin_layout Standard
10497 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10503 \begin_layout Enumerate
10507 \begin_layout Enumerate
10511 \begin_layout Enumerate
10515 \begin_layout Standard
10516 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10517 list item and use the menu
10519 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10520 Start New Environment
10523 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10524 ) and behind it the new list.
10527 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10528 Start New Parent Environment
10530 only appears if the item is nested.
10531 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10535 \begin_layout Standard
10536 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10537 (red arrow in LyX).
10538 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10539 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10542 \begin_layout Standard
10543 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10546 arg "paragraph-break"
10553 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10556 \begin_layout Section
10557 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10558 \begin_inset Index idx
10561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10570 \begin_layout Standard
10571 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10572 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10574 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10575 be broken at the end of a line.
10576 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10580 \begin_layout Subsection
10582 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10584 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10589 \begin_inset Index idx
10592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10601 \begin_layout Standard
10602 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10603 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10604 ) not to break the line at
10606 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10609 \begin_layout Quote
10610 Further documentation is given in section
10611 \begin_inset Newline newline
10615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10617 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10625 \begin_layout Standard
10626 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10641 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10650 A protected space is set with
10652 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10653 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10655 \begin_inset space ~
10663 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10669 \begin_layout Subsection
10671 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10673 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10678 \begin_inset Index idx
10681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10682 Spacing ! Horizontal
10690 \begin_layout Standard
10691 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10693 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10694 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10698 The length units are listed in Appendix
10699 \begin_inset space ~
10703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10705 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10712 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10714 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10716 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10721 \begin_inset Index idx
10724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10725 Spaces ! Inter-word
10733 \begin_layout Standard
10734 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10735 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10736 at the ends of sentences.
10737 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10738 automatically takes care about this.
10739 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10740 followed by a period; see section
10741 \begin_inset space ~
10745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10747 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10752 To insert a normal space, select
10754 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10755 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10757 \begin_inset space ~
10765 arg "space-insert normal"
10771 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10773 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10775 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10780 \begin_inset Index idx
10783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10792 \begin_layout Standard
10794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10801 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10810 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10811 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10812 inside abbreviations:
10815 \begin_layout Quote
10817 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10821 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10824 \begin_layout Standard
10825 or between values and units.
10826 Compare for example this:
10827 \begin_inset Newline newline
10831 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10835 \begin_inset Newline newline
10838 10 kg (normal space
10841 \begin_layout Standard
10842 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10844 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10845 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10847 \begin_inset space ~
10855 arg "space-insert thin"
10861 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10865 \begin_layout Standard
10866 You can also insert the following space types:
10869 \begin_layout Description
10871 \begin_inset space ~
10875 \begin_inset space ~
10878 space A line with a
10879 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10883 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10887 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10890 negative thin space between the arrows.
10893 \begin_layout Description
10895 \begin_inset space ~
10899 \begin_inset space ~
10902 space A line with a
10903 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10907 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10911 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10914 negative medium space between the arrows.
10917 \begin_layout Description
10919 \begin_inset space ~
10923 \begin_inset space ~
10926 space A line with a
10927 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10931 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10935 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10938 negative thick space between the arrows.
10941 \begin_layout Description
10943 \begin_inset space ~
10947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10951 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10955 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10959 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10963 \begin_inset space ~
10967 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10970 em) space between the arrows.
10973 \begin_layout Description
10975 \begin_inset space ~
10979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10983 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10987 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10991 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10995 \begin_inset space ~
10999 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11002 em) space between the arrows.
11005 \begin_layout Description
11007 \begin_inset space ~
11011 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11015 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11019 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11023 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11027 \begin_inset space ~
11031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11034 em) space between the arrows.
11037 \begin_layout Description
11039 \begin_inset space ~
11043 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11047 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11052 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11059 cm space between the arrows.
11062 \begin_layout Standard
11064 \begin_inset space ~
11068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11070 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11074 lists the different space sizes.
11077 \begin_layout Standard
11078 \begin_inset Float table
11083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11084 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11087 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11089 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11093 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11103 \begin_inset Tabular
11104 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11105 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11106 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11107 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11147 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11195 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11219 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11223 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11251 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11318 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11346 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11359 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11380 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11382 \begin_inset Index idx
11385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11394 \begin_layout Standard
11395 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11396 feature for adding extra space
11397 in a uniform fashion.
11398 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11399 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11400 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11401 equally between themselves.
11404 \begin_layout Standard
11405 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11408 \begin_layout Quote
11410 This is on the left side
11411 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11414 This is on the right
11417 \begin_layout Quote
11420 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11424 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11430 \begin_layout Quote
11433 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11437 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11441 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11447 \begin_layout Standard
11448 That was an example in the
11454 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11458 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11462 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11465 is one in a standard paragraph.
11466 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11470 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11473 \begin_layout Standard
11474 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11477 \begin_inset space ~
11482 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11485 \begin_layout Standard
11487 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11491 \begin_inset space ~
11497 \begin_layout Standard
11499 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11503 \begin_inset space ~
11509 \begin_layout Standard
11511 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11515 \begin_inset space ~
11521 \begin_layout Standard
11523 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11527 \begin_inset space ~
11533 \begin_layout Standard
11535 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11539 \begin_inset space ~
11545 \begin_layout Standard
11547 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11551 \begin_inset space ~
11557 \begin_layout Standard
11558 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11566 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11570 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11572 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11573 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11577 option in the space dialog.
11585 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11587 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11589 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11594 \begin_inset Index idx
11597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11606 \begin_layout Standard
11607 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11608 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11611 \begin_layout Standard
11612 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11615 What is correct English?:
11616 \begin_inset Newline newline
11620 \begin_inset Newline newline
11624 \begin_inset space ~
11627 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11628 \begin_inset Newline newline
11632 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11643 \begin_inset Newline newline
11647 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11658 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11664 \begin_layout Standard
11666 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11671 \begin_inset space ~
11675 \begin_inset space ~
11679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11683 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11685 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11686 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11690 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11696 \begin_inset space ~
11700 \begin_inset space ~
11704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11707 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11716 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11717 That is why it is named
11718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11726 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11727 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11731 \begin_layout Subsection
11733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11735 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11740 \begin_inset Index idx
11743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11752 \begin_layout Standard
11753 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11755 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11756 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11758 \begin_inset space ~
11764 There you find the following sizes:
11767 \begin_layout Standard
11780 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11781 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11786 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11788 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11789 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11791 \begin_inset space ~
11797 \begin_inset Index idx
11800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11801 Document ! Settings
11806 for the paragraph separation.
11807 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11818 \begin_layout Standard
11824 \begin_inset Index idx
11827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11833 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11834 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11839 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11840 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11849 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11858 s are described in section
11859 \begin_inset space ~
11863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11865 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11874 If there are several
11878 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11879 You can therefore use
11883 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11886 \begin_layout Standard
11891 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11892 \begin_inset space ~
11896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11898 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11905 \begin_layout Standard
11906 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11916 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11917 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11929 \begin_layout Subsection
11930 Paragraph Alignment
11931 \begin_inset Index idx
11934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11935 Paragraph ! Alignment
11943 \begin_layout Standard
11944 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11946 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11949 dialog (toolbar button
11952 arg "layout-paragraph"
11956 There are five possibilities:
11959 \begin_layout Itemize
11967 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11973 \begin_layout Itemize
11981 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11987 \begin_layout Itemize
11995 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12001 \begin_layout Itemize
12009 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12015 \begin_layout Itemize
12023 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12029 \begin_layout Standard
12030 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12031 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12032 the left and right margins.
12033 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12036 \begin_layout Standard
12038 This paragraph is right aligned,
12041 \begin_layout Standard
12043 this one is centered,
12046 \begin_layout Standard
12048 this one is left aligned.
12051 \begin_layout Subsection
12053 \begin_inset Index idx
12056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12057 Page breaks ! Forced
12063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12065 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12072 \begin_layout Standard
12073 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12074 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12075 force a page break where you want one.
12076 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12077 is good at page breaking.
12078 Only if you use a lot of
12082 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12083 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12086 \begin_layout Standard
12087 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12088 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12092 have to change the page breaking.
12095 \begin_layout Standard
12096 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12098 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12100 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12101 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12103 \begin_inset space ~
12109 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12111 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12112 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12114 \begin_inset space ~
12119 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12121 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12122 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12125 \begin_layout Standard
12126 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12127 at the top of a page.
12128 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12130 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12131 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12132 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12136 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12140 to learn more about
12147 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12149 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12151 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12156 \begin_inset Index idx
12159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12160 Page breaks ! Clear
12168 \begin_layout Standard
12169 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12170 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12171 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12172 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12173 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12176 \begin_layout Standard
12177 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12179 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12180 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12182 \begin_inset space ~
12188 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12190 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12191 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12193 \begin_inset space ~
12197 \begin_inset space ~
12202 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12203 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12206 \begin_layout Subsection
12208 \begin_inset Index idx
12211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12218 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12220 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12227 \begin_layout Standard
12228 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12230 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12232 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12233 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12235 \begin_inset space ~
12239 \begin_inset space ~
12247 arg "newline-insert newline"
12251 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12253 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12254 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12256 \begin_inset space ~
12260 \begin_inset space ~
12268 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12271 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12273 This is useful to avoid
12274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12281 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12284 \begin_layout Standard
12285 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12286 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12288 very good at line breaking.
12289 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12290 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12291 \begin_inset space ~
12295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12297 reference "sec:Quote"
12302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12304 reference "sec:Verse"
12309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12311 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12318 \begin_layout Subsection
12320 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12322 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12327 \begin_inset Index idx
12330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12339 \begin_layout Standard
12341 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12352 \begin_layout Standard
12356 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12357 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12359 \begin_inset space ~
12364 you can insert horizontal lines.
12365 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12366 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12367 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12370 \begin_layout Standard
12372 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12383 \begin_layout Section
12384 Characters and Symbols
12387 \begin_layout Standard
12388 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12389 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12390 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12398 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12402 for information on how this is done.
12405 \begin_layout Standard
12406 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12411 dialog via the menu
12413 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12414 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12420 \begin_layout Standard
12421 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12429 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12430 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12432 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12440 \begin_layout Section
12441 Fonts and Text Styles
12442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12444 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12451 \begin_layout Subsection
12453 \begin_inset Index idx
12456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12465 \begin_layout Standard
12466 There are two types of fonts:
12469 \begin_layout Description
12471 \begin_inset space ~
12475 \begin_inset Index idx
12478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12484 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12485 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12489 characters) in the font.
12490 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12491 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12492 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12493 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12494 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12495 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12496 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12497 \begin_inset Newline newline
12500 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12501 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12502 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12503 sizes than at small ones.
12504 \begin_inset Newline newline
12518 \begin_inset space ~
12526 \begin_layout Description
12528 \begin_inset space ~
12532 \begin_inset Index idx
12535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12541 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12542 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12543 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12544 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12545 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12546 image manipulation program.
12547 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12548 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12549 \begin_inset space ~
12552 pixels high up to 34
12553 \begin_inset space ~
12556 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12557 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12558 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12560 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12561 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12562 \begin_inset Newline newline
12565 Bitmap fonts are named
12568 \begin_inset space ~
12573 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12576 \begin_layout Standard
12577 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12578 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12579 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12580 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12581 use scalable fonts.
12584 \begin_layout Standard
12585 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12588 \begin_layout Standard
12589 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12590 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12591 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12592 font to emphasize text, you use an
12593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12601 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12603 In \SpecialChar LyX
12604 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12608 \begin_layout Subsection
12611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12613 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12620 \begin_layout Standard
12621 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12622 used its own fonts.
12623 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12624 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12627 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12628 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12629 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12630 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12631 to a word processor.
12632 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12633 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12634 files are very portable across
12635 different machines.
12636 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12637 has increased a lot
12638 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12641 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12643 \begin_inset space ~
12647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12649 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12654 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12655 code in the document
12656 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12659 \begin_layout Standard
12660 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12661 engines that are also able directly
12662 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12664 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12666 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12668 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12669 that is installed on your system.
12670 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12673 \begin_layout Standard
12674 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12682 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12683 es; so you might have to experiment.
12691 \begin_layout Subsection
12692 Document Font and Font size
12693 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12695 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12700 \begin_inset Index idx
12703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12710 \begin_inset Index idx
12713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12722 \begin_layout Standard
12723 You can set the document fonts in the
12725 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12729 \begin_inset Index idx
12732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12733 Document ! Settings
12743 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12744 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12747 \begin_inset space ~
12756 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12758 \begin_inset space ~
12761 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12764 \begin_layout Standard
12769 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12770 This requires that you use
12782 as the output format, i.
12783 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12787 \begin_inset space \space{}
12790 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12791 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12792 installed (see section
12793 \begin_inset space ~
12797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12799 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12804 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12806 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12807 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12809 \begin_inset space ~
12812 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12813 cannot determine the family.
12814 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12815 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12818 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12821 \begin_layout Standard
12822 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12823 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12828 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12834 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12835 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12843 \begin_inset space ~
12849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12862 European Computer Modern
12865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12872 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12875 \begin_layout Standard
12884 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12885 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12890 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12893 \begin_inset space ~
12898 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12904 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12905 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12908 \begin_layout Itemize
12912 \begin_inset space ~
12917 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12930 \begin_inset space ~
12935 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12936 community in order to replace
12940 as the default font.
12941 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12942 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12945 \begin_inset space ~
12958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12959 One difference is improved kerning.
12967 \begin_layout Itemize
12971 \begin_inset space ~
12975 \begin_inset space ~
12980 fonts in (the rare) case that
12983 \begin_inset space ~
12988 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
13003 Virtual means that it
13004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13015 -glyphs from other fonts.
13016 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13038 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13044 \begin_inset Index idx
13047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13049 -packages ! aeguill
13054 with the document preamble line
13055 \begin_inset Newline newline
13062 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13063 \begin_inset Newline newline
13068 will fix the guillemet problem.
13073 and that accented characters are not
13077 glyph, but built of
13081 characters, the accent and the letter.
13082 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13088 If you search for example for the French word
13089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13096 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13105 and not for the glyph
13106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13110 \begin_inset space ~
13114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13120 \begin_layout Itemize
13121 If you do not like the look of
13129 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13130 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13134 \begin_inset space ~
13140 \begin_inset space ~
13150 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13151 \begin_inset space ~
13154 serif and typewriter fonts,
13158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13159 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13166 \begin_inset space ~
13175 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13180 \begin_inset space \space{}
13188 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13192 \begin_inset space \space{}
13198 \begin_inset space ~
13206 \begin_inset space ~
13216 but you can also select your own.
13217 \begin_inset Newline newline
13220 The differences between roman,
13223 \begin_inset space ~
13232 fonts are explained in section
13233 \begin_inset space ~
13237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13239 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13244 \begin_inset Newline newline
13250 \begin_inset space ~
13255 was originally designed for newspapers.
13256 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13257 into the small newspaper columns.
13261 \begin_inset space ~
13266 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13269 \begin_layout Standard
13270 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13283 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13288 depends on the class you are using.
13289 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13292 \begin_layout Standard
13293 Note that the font size is the
13298 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13299 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13300 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13301 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13304 \begin_inset space ~
13310 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13311 \begin_inset space ~
13315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13317 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13324 \begin_layout Standard
13328 \begin_inset space ~
13333 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13335 \begin_inset space ~
13338 serif or typewriter.
13343 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13353 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13356 \begin_layout Standard
13361 LaTeX font encoding
13363 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13364 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13370 \begin_inset Index idx
13373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13375 -packages ! fontenc
13381 \begin_inset space ~
13385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13387 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13392 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13393 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13400 \begin_layout Standard
13401 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13403 Use Old Style Figures
13407 Use True Small Caps
13410 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13413 Use Old Style Figures
13415 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13417 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13418 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13422 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13425 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13429 Use True Small Caps
13431 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13432 of scaled capitals.
13433 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13434 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13437 \begin_layout Standard
13442 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13443 a font to display the script characters.
13447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13448 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13454 \begin_inset Index idx
13457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13464 So this has no effect for the document language
13478 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13482 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13490 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13495 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13496 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13498 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13500 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13503 dialog, see section
13504 \begin_inset space ~
13508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13510 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13522 \begin_layout Subsection
13526 \begin_layout Standard
13527 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13528 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13530 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13531 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13532 choose a math font in the dialog
13534 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13538 \begin_inset Index idx
13541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13542 Document ! Settings
13548 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13549 automatically selects a math font.
13550 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13551 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13560 \begin_inset space ~
13566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13571 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13572 document font is available.
13575 \begin_layout Standard
13576 Note that the math font will not be used for
13580 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13586 or by the insertion of the command
13593 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13594 \begin_inset space ~
13598 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13599 while the math characters do not.
13601 \begin_inset space ~
13604 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13607 \begin_inset space ~
13615 \begin_inset space ~
13620 in the document font settings.
13623 \begin_layout Standard
13624 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13625 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13626 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13627 font (in most cases
13628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13634 \begin_inset space ~
13640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13643 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13644 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13652 \begin_inset space ~
13658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13664 \begin_layout Subsection
13665 Using Different Character Styles
13666 \begin_inset Index idx
13669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13676 \begin_inset Index idx
13679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13688 \begin_layout Standard
13689 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13690 automatically changes the character style for certain
13691 paragraph environments.
13693 supports two character styles,
13702 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13706 \begin_layout Standard
13711 style, do one of the following:
13714 \begin_layout Itemize
13715 click on the toolbar button
13724 \begin_layout Itemize
13725 use the key binding
13734 \begin_layout Standard
13735 These commands are all toggles.
13740 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13743 \begin_layout Standard
13744 One typically uses the
13748 style for proper names.
13750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13757 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13765 \begin_layout Standard
13766 A more widely used character style is the
13771 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13778 \begin_layout Itemize
13779 clicking on the toolbar button
13788 \begin_layout Itemize
13789 using the keybindings
13798 \begin_layout Standard
13803 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13805 use a different font.
13808 \begin_layout Standard
13809 We've been using the
13813 style all over the place in this document.
13814 Here's one more example:
13817 \begin_layout Quotation
13820 Do not overuse character styles!
13823 \begin_layout Standard
13824 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13825 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13826 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13827 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13831 \begin_layout Standard
13832 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13840 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13842 \begin_inset space ~
13845 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13851 arg "dialog-show character"
13857 \begin_layout Subsection
13858 Fine-Tuning with the
13863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13865 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13870 \begin_inset Index idx
13873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13882 \begin_layout Standard
13883 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13885 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13886 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13887 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13888 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13889 from ordinary dialog.
13892 \begin_layout Standard
13893 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13894 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13895 \begin_inset Newline newline
13898 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13899 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13902 \begin_layout Standard
13903 To use custom character styles, open the
13905 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13907 \begin_inset space ~
13910 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13913 dialog or press the toolbar button
13916 arg "dialog-show character"
13920 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13921 font property that you can choose.
13922 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13925 \begin_inset space ~
13930 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13935 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13936 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13937 environments all at once.
13940 \begin_layout Standard
13941 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13944 \begin_inset space ~
13956 \begin_layout Labeling
13957 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13971 The possible options are:
13975 \begin_layout Labeling
13976 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13981 This is the Roman font family.
13982 Normally a serif font.
13983 It's also the default family.
13993 \begin_layout Labeling
13994 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13998 \begin_inset space ~
14005 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14017 \begin_layout Labeling
14018 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14025 This is the Typewriter font family.
14031 arg "font-typewriter"
14040 \begin_layout Labeling
14041 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14046 This corresponds to the print weight.
14051 \begin_layout Labeling
14052 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14057 This is the Medium font series.
14058 It's also the default series.
14061 \begin_layout Labeling
14062 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14069 This is the Bold font series.
14082 \begin_layout Labeling
14083 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14088 As the name implies.
14093 \begin_layout Labeling
14094 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14099 This is the Upright font shape.
14100 It's also the default shape.
14103 \begin_layout Labeling
14104 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14118 s the Italic font shape
14124 \begin_layout Labeling
14125 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14132 This is the Slanted font shape
14134 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14135 , this is different from italic).
14138 \begin_layout Labeling
14139 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14143 \begin_inset space ~
14150 This is the Small caps font shape
14157 \begin_layout Labeling
14158 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14163 Alters the text color.
14164 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14168 \begin_inset space ~
14173 , which means that the document default color set in
14175 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14176 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14182 \begin_inset space ~
14187 is used, you can choose between
14264 \begin_inset Index idx
14267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14276 \begin_layout Labeling
14277 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14282 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14283 the language of the document.
14284 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14285 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14287 \begin_inset Newline newline
14290 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14292 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14293 When using the spell checking (see section
14294 \begin_inset space ~
14298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14300 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14304 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14307 \begin_layout Labeling
14308 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14313 Alters the size of the font.
14314 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14315 proportional to the document font size.
14316 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14317 the details, but a general description of what
14323 \begin_layout Labeling
14324 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14345 arg "font-size tiny"
14351 \begin_layout Labeling
14352 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14373 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14379 \begin_layout Labeling
14380 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14401 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14407 \begin_layout Labeling
14408 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14429 arg "font-size small"
14435 \begin_layout Labeling
14436 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14450 It's also the default size.
14454 arg "font-size normal"
14460 \begin_layout Labeling
14461 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14482 arg "font-size large"
14488 \begin_layout Labeling
14489 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14510 arg "font-size larger"
14516 \begin_layout Labeling
14517 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14538 arg "font-size largest"
14544 \begin_layout Labeling
14545 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14566 arg "font-size huge"
14572 \begin_layout Labeling
14573 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14594 arg "font-size giant"
14600 \begin_layout Labeling
14601 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14606 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14626 arg "font-size increase"
14632 \begin_layout Labeling
14633 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14638 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14658 arg "font-size decrease"
14665 \begin_layout Standard
14670 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14671 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14673 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14674 — use those instead.
14675 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14678 \begin_layout Labeling
14679 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14684 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14689 \begin_layout Labeling
14690 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14697 This is text with emphasize on
14700 This might seem like the same as
14704 , but it is actually a bit different.
14710 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14712 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14715 \begin_layout Labeling
14716 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14723 This is text with Underbar on.
14729 arg "font-underline"
14735 \begin_inset Newline newline
14740 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14741 when you could not change fonts.
14742 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14743 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14744 because some people
14748 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14751 \begin_layout Labeling
14752 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14756 \begin_inset space ~
14763 This is text with Double underbar on.
14769 arg "font-underunderline"
14773 \begin_inset Newline newline
14776 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14777 about double underbar.
14780 \begin_layout Labeling
14781 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14785 \begin_inset space ~
14792 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14798 arg "font-underwave"
14802 \begin_inset Newline newline
14805 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14806 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14809 \begin_layout Labeling
14810 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14817 This is text with Strikeout on.
14823 arg "font-strikeout"
14827 \begin_inset Newline newline
14830 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14831 changed in the meantime.
14834 \begin_layout Labeling
14835 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14842 This is text with Noun on.
14849 , this is a logical attribute.
14850 Normally it's equivalent to
14853 \begin_inset space ~
14862 \begin_layout Standard
14863 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14864 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14866 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14868 \begin_inset space ~
14871 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14877 arg "dialog-show character"
14880 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14881 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14884 arg "textstyle-apply"
14888 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14892 \begin_layout Standard
14893 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14900 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14901 (suppose you just set the shape to
14902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14920 \begin_inset space ~
14932 \begin_layout Standard
14933 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14941 \begin_inset space ~
14953 \begin_layout Itemize
14959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14966 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14984 \begin_inset Newline newline
14988 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15002 \begin_inset Note Note
15005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15006 For more on phantoms see section
15007 \begin_inset space ~
15011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15013 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15023 \begin_inset Newline newline
15029 \begin_layout Itemize
15034 fonts use characters with serifs.
15035 These are the small
15036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15043 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15044 The following example shows the difference:
15045 \begin_inset Newline newline
15049 \begin_inset Newline newline
15054 text without serifs
15057 \begin_inset Newline newline
15060 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15061 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15068 \begin_layout Itemize
15073 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15074 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15075 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15078 \begin_layout Standard
15079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15086 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15087 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15090 \begin_inset space ~
15095 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15096 the property to be removed.
15097 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15098 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15099 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15117 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15118 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15126 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15130 \begin_inset space ~
15135 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15146 If you, for example, set
15147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15165 \begin_inset space ~
15170 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15179 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15182 \begin_layout Standard
15183 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15184 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15187 \begin_layout Section
15188 Printing and Previewing
15191 \begin_layout Subsection
15195 \begin_layout Standard
15196 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15197 using \SpecialChar LyX
15198 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15199 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15200 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15201 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15203 Additional Features
15208 \begin_layout Standard
15210 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15213 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15214 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15215 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15218 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15219 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15220 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15221 to turn your writing into printable output.
15222 This happens in two stages:
15225 \begin_layout Enumerate
15226 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15227 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15229 a file with the extension,
15230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15244 \begin_layout Enumerate
15245 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15246 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15247 to use the commands in the
15251 file to produce printable output.
15254 \begin_layout Subsection
15255 Output file formats
15256 \begin_inset Index idx
15259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15266 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15268 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15275 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15276 Simple text (ASCII)
15277 \begin_inset Index idx
15280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15281 File formats ! ASCII
15289 \begin_layout Standard
15290 This file type has the extension
15291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15303 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15307 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15314 \begin_layout Standard
15315 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15317 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15318 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15320 \begin_inset space ~
15326 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15327 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15328 bibliography (section
15329 \begin_inset space ~
15333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15335 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15340 If your document includes such material, use
15342 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15343 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15345 \begin_inset space ~
15349 \begin_inset space ~
15353 \begin_inset space ~
15361 \begin_inset space ~
15365 \begin_inset space ~
15371 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15372 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15375 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15378 \begin_inset Index idx
15381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15382 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15391 \begin_layout Standard
15392 This file type has the extension
15393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15404 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15407 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15408 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15409 -Errors or to process it manually
15410 with console commands.
15411 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15412 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15413 's temporary directory whenever you
15414 view or export your document.
15417 \begin_layout Standard
15418 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15419 -file using the menu
15421 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15422 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15426 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15427 export variants are explained in section
15428 \begin_inset space ~
15432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15434 reference "subsec:Export"
15441 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15443 \begin_inset Index idx
15446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15455 \begin_layout Standard
15456 This file type has the extension
15457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15477 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15478 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15479 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15483 \begin_layout Standard
15484 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15485 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15486 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15487 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15488 when you view the DVI.
15489 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15492 \begin_layout Standard
15493 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15495 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15496 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15501 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15502 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15504 \begin_inset space ~
15510 The latter option uses the program
15512 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15518 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15521 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15522 font access (see section
15523 \begin_inset space ~
15527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15529 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15534 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15535 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15540 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15542 \begin_inset Index idx
15545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15546 File formats ! PostScript
15554 \begin_layout Standard
15555 This file type has the extension
15556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15568 PostScript was developed by the company
15572 as a printer language.
15573 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15575 PostScript can be seen as a
15576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15579 programming language
15580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15583 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15588 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15595 \begin_inset Index idx
15598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15600 -packages ! pstricks
15610 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15613 \begin_layout Standard
15614 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15618 Encapsulated PostScript
15619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15622 (EPS, file extension
15623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15635 As \SpecialChar LyX
15636 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15637 convert them in the background to EPS.
15638 If, for example, you have 50
15639 \begin_inset space ~
15642 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15644 \begin_inset space ~
15647 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15648 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15650 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15651 EPS to avoid this problem.
15654 \begin_layout Standard
15655 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15657 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15658 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15664 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15666 \begin_inset Index idx
15669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15676 \begin_inset Index idx
15679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15688 \begin_layout Standard
15689 This file type has the extension
15690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15706 Portable Document Format
15707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15714 was derived from PostScript.
15715 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15724 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15725 looks exactly the same.
15728 \begin_layout Standard
15729 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15733 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15737 (JPG, file extension
15738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15765 Portable Network Graphics
15766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15769 (PNG, file extension
15770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15782 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15783 converts them in the
15784 background to one of these formats.
15785 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15786 will slow down your workflow.
15787 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15790 \begin_layout Standard
15791 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15793 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15799 \begin_layout Description
15801 \begin_inset space ~
15804 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15808 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15811 \begin_layout Description
15813 \begin_inset space ~
15820 ) This uses the program
15822 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15825 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15828 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15831 is a new engine, derived from
15835 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15836 access (see section
15837 \begin_inset space ~
15841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15843 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15848 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15849 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15854 \begin_layout Description
15856 \begin_inset space ~
15863 ) This uses the program
15868 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15874 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15875 font access (see section
15876 \begin_inset space ~
15880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15882 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15887 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15888 vertically written Japanese.
15891 \begin_layout Description
15893 \begin_inset space ~
15896 (cropped) This is the same as
15899 \begin_inset space ~
15904 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15905 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15906 to generate good-looking
15907 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15910 \begin_layout Description
15912 \begin_inset space ~
15915 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15919 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15923 \begin_layout Description
15925 \begin_inset space ~
15928 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15932 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15933 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15937 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15938 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15941 \begin_layout Standard
15945 \begin_inset space ~
15954 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15955 works without problems.
15956 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15957 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15961 \begin_inset space ~
15969 \begin_inset space ~
15974 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15982 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15984 \begin_inset Index idx
15987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15988 FileFormats ! XHTML
15994 \begin_inset Index idx
15997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16006 \begin_layout Standard
16007 This file type has the extension
16008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16020 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16021 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16022 When \SpecialChar LyX
16023 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16024 suitable for the purpose.
16025 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16027 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16028 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16031 between different formats, which are described in section
16033 Math Output in XHTML
16038 \begin_inset space ~
16046 \begin_layout Standard
16047 XHTML output remains
16048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16055 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16056 features are supported yet.
16060 and the World Wide Web
16064 Additional Features
16066 manual, for more information.
16069 \begin_layout Standard
16070 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16072 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16073 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16079 \begin_layout Subsection
16081 \begin_inset Index idx
16084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16093 \begin_layout Standard
16094 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16095 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16104 or use the toolbar button
16111 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16112 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16113 \begin_inset space ~
16117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16119 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16123 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16125 \begin_inset space ~
16129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16131 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16136 Further output formats can be selected via
16138 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16139 View (Other Formats)
16141 or the toolbar button
16150 \begin_layout Standard
16151 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16152 viewer window using the menu
16154 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16159 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16160 Update (Other Formats)
16165 \begin_layout Standard
16166 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16169 To have a real output, export your document.
16172 \begin_layout Section
16173 A few Words about Typography
16174 \begin_inset Index idx
16177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16186 \begin_layout Subsection
16187 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16188 \begin_inset Index idx
16191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16198 \begin_inset Index idx
16201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16210 \begin_layout Standard
16211 In \SpecialChar LyX
16213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16224 character comes in four lengths: the
16236 , and the minus sign:
16237 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16243 \begin_layout Standard
16244 \begin_inset Tabular
16245 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16246 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16247 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16248 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16249 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16250 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16279 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16319 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16344 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16346 \begin_inset space ~
16349 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16356 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16381 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16383 \begin_inset space ~
16386 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16407 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16441 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16447 \begin_layout Standard
16448 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16460 character multiple times in a row.
16461 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16462 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16469 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16481 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16485 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16495 \begin_layout Standard
16496 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16497 math mode and has a length of its own.
16498 Here are some examples:
16501 \begin_layout Enumerate
16502 line- and page-breaks
16503 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16513 \begin_layout Enumerate
16515 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16525 \begin_layout Enumerate
16526 Oh — there's a dash.
16527 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16537 \begin_layout Enumerate
16538 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16542 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16552 \begin_layout Subsection
16554 \begin_inset Index idx
16557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16564 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16566 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16573 \begin_layout Standard
16574 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16575 but automatically in the output.
16576 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16582 \begin_inset Index idx
16585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16592 following the rules of the document language.
16595 \begin_layout Standard
16597 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16601 font and with unusual constructs, like
16602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16610 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16611 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16612 This is done with the menu
16614 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16615 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16617 \begin_inset space ~
16623 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16625 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16629 \begin_layout Standard
16630 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16631 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16642 would then see the hyphen
16643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16650 as a hyphenation possibility.
16651 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16652 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16653 as described in section
16655 Prevent Hyphenation
16660 \begin_inset space ~
16668 \begin_layout Subsection
16670 \begin_inset Index idx
16673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16682 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16683 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16686 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16693 \begin_layout Standard
16694 When \SpecialChar LyX
16695 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16696 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16698 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16704 appropriate amount of space.
16705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16708 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16710 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16711 gets after another word.
16714 \begin_layout Standard
16715 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16716 not work in all cases.
16718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16729 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16730 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16733 \begin_layout Standard
16734 Here are some examples of
16738 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16741 \begin_layout Itemize
16746 \begin_layout Itemize
16751 \begin_layout Standard
16752 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16755 \begin_layout Itemize
16757 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16761 this is too much space!
16764 \begin_layout Itemize
16769 \begin_layout Standard
16770 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16773 \begin_layout Standard
16774 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16777 \begin_layout Enumerate
16781 \begin_inset space ~
16786 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16787 \begin_inset space ~
16791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16793 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16798 \begin_inset Index idx
16801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16802 Spaces ! inter-word
16810 \begin_layout Enumerate
16814 \begin_inset space ~
16819 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16820 \begin_inset space ~
16824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16826 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16831 \begin_inset Index idx
16834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16843 \begin_layout Enumerate
16847 \begin_inset space ~
16851 \begin_inset space ~
16855 \begin_inset space ~
16862 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16864 \begin_inset space ~
16869 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16870 This function is also bound to
16873 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16879 \begin_layout Standard
16880 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16883 \begin_layout Itemize
16885 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16889 \begin_inset space \space{}
16892 this is too much space!
16895 \begin_layout Itemize
16896 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16900 \begin_layout Standard
16901 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16902 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16904 will take care of this.
16907 \begin_layout Standard
16908 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16912 \begin_inset space ~
16918 feature described in the section
16920 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16925 Additional Features
16930 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16932 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667523
16934 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669265
16938 \begin_inset Index idx
16941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16943 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669122
16945 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669123
16954 \begin_inset Index idx
16957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16959 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669129
16961 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669204
16968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16994 \begin_layout Standard
16997 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666231
16999 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666233
17003 Specifically, it will
17004 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667043
17006 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667044
17010 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666244
17012 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666245
17015 at the beginning of quoted text, and use a closing
17016 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666248
17018 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666249
17023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17031 The keyboard character,
17035 , generates this automatically.
17038 \begin_layout Standard
17039 You can specify what character the
17044 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669340
17048 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667059
17057 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17061 \begin_inset Index idx
17064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17065 Document ! Settings
17071 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667133
17073 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669342
17079 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667108
17082 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17083 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language)
17087 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666221
17089 \change_inserted -712698321 1482756786
17095 \begin_layout Labeling
17096 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17099 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17110 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666647
17112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17120 \begin_inset space ~
17124 \begin_inset space ~
17128 \begin_inset Quotes els
17132 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17140 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17142 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665592
17146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17150 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665595
17152 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17156 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665605
17160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17164 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665637
17166 \begin_inset Quotes els
17170 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17173 quotation marks (as common, e.
17174 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17182 \begin_layout Labeling
17183 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17185 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666660
17188 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17192 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17196 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666671
17198 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17202 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17206 \begin_inset space ~
17210 \begin_inset space ~
17214 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17218 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17226 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666660
17227 Use quotes like ”this”
17228 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665692
17230 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17234 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17238 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17242 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17245 quotation marks (as common, e.
17246 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17254 \begin_layout Labeling
17255 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17257 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666683
17260 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17264 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17268 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666696
17270 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17274 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17278 \begin_inset space ~
17282 \begin_inset space ~
17286 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17290 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17298 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666683
17300 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17304 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17308 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665749
17310 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17314 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17318 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17322 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17325 quotation marks (as common, e.
17326 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17334 \begin_layout Labeling
17335 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17337 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666707
17340 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17344 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17348 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666716
17350 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17354 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17358 \begin_inset space ~
17362 \begin_inset space ~
17366 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17370 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17378 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666707
17380 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17384 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17388 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665786
17390 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17394 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17398 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17402 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17405 quotation marks (as common, e.
17406 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17414 \begin_layout Labeling
17415 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17417 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666725
17420 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17424 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17428 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666730
17430 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17434 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17438 \begin_inset space ~
17442 \begin_inset space ~
17446 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17450 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17458 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666725
17460 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17464 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17468 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665816
17470 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17474 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17478 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17482 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17485 quotation marks (as common, e.
17486 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17489 g., in Switzerland)
17494 \begin_layout Labeling
17495 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17497 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666741
17500 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17504 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17508 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666747
17510 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17514 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17518 \begin_inset space ~
17522 \begin_inset space ~
17526 \begin_inset Quotes als
17530 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17538 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666741
17540 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17544 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17548 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665851
17550 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17554 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17558 \begin_inset Quotes als
17562 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17565 quotation marks (as common, e.
17566 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17572 \begin_layout Labeling
17573 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17575 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666768
17578 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17582 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17586 \begin_inset space ~
17590 \begin_inset space ~
17594 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17598 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17604 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17608 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17612 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17616 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17619 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17622 \begin_layout Labeling
17623 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17625 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666784
17628 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17632 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17636 \begin_inset space ~
17640 \begin_inset space ~
17644 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17648 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17654 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17658 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17662 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17666 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17669 quotation marks (as common, e.
17670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17673 g., in Great Britain)
17676 \begin_layout Labeling
17677 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17679 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666803
17682 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17686 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17690 \begin_inset space ~
17694 \begin_inset space ~
17698 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17702 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17708 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17712 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17716 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17720 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17723 quotation marks (as common, e.
17724 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17730 \begin_layout Labeling
17731 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17733 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668207
17736 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17740 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17744 \begin_inset space ~
17748 \begin_inset space ~
17752 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17756 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17762 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17766 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17770 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17774 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17777 quotation marks (another style common in France)
17781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17783 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668407
17784 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
17785 since these look identical to the inner marks.
17786 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
17787 the inner marks differ).
17797 \begin_layout Labeling
17798 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17800 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666837
17803 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17807 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17811 \begin_inset space ~
17815 \begin_inset space ~
17819 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17823 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17829 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17833 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17837 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17841 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17844 quotation marks (as common, e.
17845 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17851 \begin_layout Labeling
17852 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17854 \change_inserted -712698321 1482756796
17857 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17861 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17865 \begin_inset space ~
17869 \begin_inset space ~
17873 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17877 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17883 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17887 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17891 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17895 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17898 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
17901 \begin_layout Labeling
17902 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17904 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757086
17905 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17913 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17919 \begin_inset space ~
17923 \begin_inset space ~
17929 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17937 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17941 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17945 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17949 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17953 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17956 quotation marks (as common, e.
17957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17966 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757158
17967 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
17968 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
17978 \begin_layout Labeling
17979 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17981 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757171
17982 \begin_inset Quotes kld
17990 \begin_inset Quotes krd
17996 \begin_inset space ~
18000 \begin_inset space ~
18006 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18014 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18018 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18022 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18026 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18030 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18033 quotation marks (as common, e.
18034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18037 g., in North Korea and China)
18041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18043 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757171
18044 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18045 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18055 \begin_layout Standard
18057 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667281
18059 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667281
18063 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666272
18065 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667398
18070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18072 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668512
18073 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18074 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18075 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18083 does not necessarily mean
18084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18092 This is why we call them
18093 \begin_inset Quotes els
18097 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18118 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668702
18119 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18121 \begin_inset Quotes els
18125 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18129 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667343
18131 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667350
18132 can be obtained by means of
18137 arg "quote-insert single"
18141 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668731
18144 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18150 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667602
18154 \begin_layout Standard
18156 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668992
18157 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18158 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18159 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18160 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18161 If you check the setting
18163 Use dynamic quotation marks
18167 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18168 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18171 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18172 they appear in a special color).
18173 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18174 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18179 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18182 \begin_layout Standard
18184 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667904
18185 Individual quotation marks (i.
18186 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18189 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18190 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18196 \begin_layout Subsection
18198 \begin_inset Index idx
18201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18202 Typography ! Ligatures
18208 \begin_inset Index idx
18211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18240 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18242 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18249 \begin_layout Standard
18250 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18251 print them as single characters.
18252 These groups are known as
18257 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18258 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18260 Here are the standard ligatures:
18263 \begin_layout Itemize
18267 \begin_layout Itemize
18271 \begin_layout Itemize
18275 \begin_layout Itemize
18279 \begin_layout Itemize
18283 \begin_layout Standard
18284 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18287 \begin_layout Standard
18288 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18289 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18297 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18313 To break a ligature, use
18315 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18316 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18318 \begin_inset space ~
18325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18336 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18353 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18361 \begin_layout Subsection
18363 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18365 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669270
18367 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669270
18371 \begin_inset Index idx
18374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18382 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18384 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
18391 \begin_layout Standard
18394 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18395 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18399 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18402 \begin_layout Description
18404 The name of the game.
18407 \begin_layout Description
18409 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18413 \begin_layout Description
18415 The \SpecialChar TeX
18416 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18420 \begin_layout Description
18421 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18422 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18426 \begin_layout Standard
18427 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18433 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18441 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18442 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18443 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18444 converges to the number
18445 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18448 : The actual version is
18449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18457 , the previous one was
18458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18469 \begin_layout Subsection
18471 \begin_inset Index idx
18474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18483 \begin_layout Standard
18484 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18485 space between two words.
18486 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18496 for units use the menu
18498 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18499 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18501 \begin_inset space ~
18509 arg "space-insert thin"
18515 \begin_layout Standard
18516 Here is an example to show the differences:
18519 \begin_layout Standard
18520 \begin_inset Tabular
18521 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18522 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18523 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18524 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18531 \begin_inset space ~
18535 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18547 space between number and unit
18554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18559 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18563 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18575 half space between number and unit
18588 \begin_layout Subsection
18590 \begin_inset Index idx
18593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18594 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18602 \begin_layout Standard
18603 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18605 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18606 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18607 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18608 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18609 These bits of text became known as
18620 \begin_layout Standard
18621 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18622 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18623 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18624 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18625 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18626 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18627 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18628 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18629 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18630 \begin_inset Newline newline
18638 \begin_inset Newline newline
18646 \begin_inset Newline newline
18649 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18650 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18651 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18653 \begin_inset space ~
18657 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18659 key "latexcompanion"
18664 \begin_inset space ~
18668 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18674 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18675 's page break mechanism.
18678 \begin_layout Chapter
18679 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18680 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18682 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18689 \begin_layout Standard
18690 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18693 \begin_inset space ~
18699 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18702 \begin_layout Section
18704 \begin_inset Index idx
18707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18714 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18723 \begin_layout Standard
18725 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18728 \begin_layout Description
18731 \begin_inset space ~
18734 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18735 \begin_inset Newline newline
18739 \begin_inset Note Note
18742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18743 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18751 \begin_layout Description
18752 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18753 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18754 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18757 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18758 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18760 \begin_inset space ~
18766 \begin_inset Newline newline
18770 \begin_inset Note Comment
18773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18774 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18783 \begin_layout Description
18785 \begin_inset space ~
18788 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18789 set in the document settings under
18791 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18793 \begin_inset space ~
18799 \begin_inset Newline newline
18803 \begin_inset Newline newline
18807 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18816 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18817 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18822 of a comment that appears in the output.
18828 \begin_inset Newline newline
18832 \begin_inset Newline newline
18835 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18838 \begin_layout Standard
18839 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18847 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18851 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18854 \begin_layout Section
18856 \begin_inset Index idx
18859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18866 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18868 name "sec:Footnotes"
18875 \begin_layout Standard
18877 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18880 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18883 or the toolbar button
18886 arg "footnote-insert"
18898 \begin_inset Graphics
18899 filename clipart/footnote.png
18908 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18909 's representation of your footnote.
18919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18938 label, the box will
18942 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
18943 Clicking on the box label again will close
18956 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
18957 and click on the footnote
18972 \begin_layout Standard
18973 Here is an example footnote:
18981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18982 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
18990 \begin_layout Standard
18991 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
18992 position where the footnote box is placed.
18993 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
18994 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
18995 according to the document class.
18997 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
18998 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19004 ey are described in the
19007 \begin_inset space ~
19015 \begin_layout Section
19017 \begin_inset Index idx
19020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19027 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19029 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19036 \begin_layout Standard
19037 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19039 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19041 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19043 \begin_inset space ~
19048 or the toolbar button
19051 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19077 appearing within your text.
19078 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19079 's representation of your margin
19088 \begin_layout Standard
19089 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19093 \begin_inset Marginal
19096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19098 This is a marginal note.
19106 \begin_layout Standard
19107 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19108 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19109 pages, right on odd pages.
19112 \begin_layout Standard
19113 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19116 \begin_inset space ~
19124 \begin_inset space ~
19132 \begin_layout Section
19133 Graphics and Images
19134 \begin_inset Index idx
19137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19144 \begin_inset Index idx
19147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19154 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19156 name "sec:Graphics"
19163 \begin_layout Standard
19164 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19165 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19168 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19173 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19177 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19180 \begin_layout Standard
19181 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19186 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19187 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19189 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19190 \begin_inset space ~
19194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19196 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19203 \begin_layout Standard
19208 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19209 of the image in the output.
19210 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19214 \begin_inset space ~
19218 \begin_inset space ~
19227 \begin_inset space ~
19231 \begin_inset space ~
19235 \begin_inset space ~
19240 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19241 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19249 \begin_layout Standard
19253 \begin_inset space ~
19257 \begin_inset space ~
19262 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19263 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19265 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19270 \begin_inset space ~
19275 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19276 with the image size is printed.
19279 \begin_layout Standard
19280 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19281 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19283 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19286 \begin_layout Standard
19288 \begin_inset Graphics
19289 filename clipart/mobius.eps
19297 \begin_layout Standard
19298 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19299 the image into a float, see section
19300 \begin_inset space ~
19304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19306 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19313 \begin_layout Subsection
19315 \begin_inset Index idx
19318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19325 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19327 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19334 \begin_layout Standard
19335 You can insert images in any known file format.
19336 But as we explained in section
19337 \begin_inset space ~
19341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19343 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19347 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19349 therefore uses the program
19353 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19354 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19355 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19356 \begin_inset space ~
19360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19362 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19369 \begin_layout Standard
19370 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19373 \begin_layout Description
19375 \begin_inset space ~
19378 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19379 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19380 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19384 Graphics Interchange Format
19385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19388 (GIF, file extension
19389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19401 \begin_inset Index idx
19404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19436 Portable Network Graphics
19437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19440 (PNG, file extension
19441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19453 \begin_inset Index idx
19456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19488 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19492 (JPG, file extension
19493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19517 \begin_inset Index idx
19520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19551 \begin_layout Description
19553 \begin_inset space ~
19556 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19558 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19559 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19560 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19561 \begin_inset Newline newline
19564 Scalable image formats can be
19565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19568 Scalable Vector Graphics
19569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19572 (SVG, file extension
19573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19585 \begin_inset Index idx
19588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19620 Encapsulated PostScript
19621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19624 (EPS, file extension
19625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19637 \begin_inset Index idx
19640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19672 Portable Document Format
19673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19676 (PDF, file extension
19677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19689 \begin_inset Index idx
19692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19707 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19708 result will not be scalable.
19709 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19715 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19723 \begin_layout Standard
19724 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19731 \begin_layout Subsection
19732 Grouping of Image Settings
19733 \begin_inset Index idx
19736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19737 Images ! Settings grouping
19745 \begin_layout Standard
19746 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19748 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19749 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19751 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19752 need to manually change each of them.
19756 \begin_layout Standard
19757 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19760 \begin_inset space ~
19764 \begin_inset space ~
19776 \begin_inset space ~
19780 \begin_inset space ~
19786 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19787 and checking the name of the desired group.
19790 \begin_layout Section
19792 \begin_inset Index idx
19795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19802 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19811 \begin_layout Standard
19812 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19815 arg "tabular-insert"
19820 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19824 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19825 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19826 from the rest of the table.
19827 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19828 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19830 Here is an example table:
19833 \begin_layout Standard
19835 \begin_inset Tabular
19836 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19837 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19838 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19839 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19840 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19841 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20041 \begin_layout Subsection
20045 \begin_layout Standard
20046 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20049 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20053 This brings up the table dialog.
20054 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20055 cursor is placed currently.
20056 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20057 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20058 done on all of your selection.
20061 \begin_layout Standard
20062 In addition to the table dialog, the
20065 \begin_inset space ~
20070 helps you in setting table properties.
20071 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20074 \begin_layout Standard
20078 \begin_inset space ~
20083 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20084 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20085 current cell respectively.
20086 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20088 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20089 of text, see section
20090 \begin_inset space ~
20094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20096 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20103 \begin_layout Standard
20104 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20105 using the check box
20114 This will merge the cells to
20118 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20119 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20120 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20121 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20122 in the last row without the upper border:
20125 \begin_layout Standard
20127 \begin_inset Tabular
20128 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20129 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20130 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20131 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20132 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20133 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20144 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20153 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20229 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20264 \begin_layout Standard
20265 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20266 -arguments for the table.
20267 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20268 explained in the chapter
20275 \begin_inset space ~
20281 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20282 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20283 but are visible in the output.
20286 \begin_layout Standard
20287 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20295 Most DVI-viewers are
20299 able to display rotations.
20307 \begin_layout Standard
20312 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20317 adds lines for all cell borders.
20320 \begin_layout Subsection
20322 \begin_inset Index idx
20325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20326 Tables ! Multi-page
20332 \begin_inset Index idx
20335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20344 \begin_layout Standard
20345 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20348 \begin_inset space ~
20352 \begin_inset space ~
20360 \begin_inset space ~
20365 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20366 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20369 \begin_layout Description
20374 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20375 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20376 Except for the first page, if
20379 \begin_inset space ~
20387 \begin_layout Description
20391 \begin_inset space ~
20396 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20397 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20400 \begin_layout Description
20405 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20406 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20407 except for the last page, if
20410 \begin_inset space ~
20418 \begin_layout Description
20422 \begin_inset space ~
20427 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20428 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20431 \begin_layout Description
20432 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20433 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20435 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20439 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20442 \begin_inset space ~
20450 \begin_layout Standard
20451 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20452 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20453 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20459 In this context, first means first in this order:
20462 \begin_inset space ~
20474 \begin_inset space ~
20479 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20482 \begin_layout Standard
20484 \begin_inset Tabular
20485 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20486 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20487 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20488 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20489 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20490 <row endfirsthead="true">
20491 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20497 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20502 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20511 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20521 <row endfirsthead="true">
20522 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20533 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20542 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20554 <row endhead="true">
20555 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20566 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20575 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20585 <row endhead="true">
20586 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20597 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20606 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20618 <row endfoot="true">
20619 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20630 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20639 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20670 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21611 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21620 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21629 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21640 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21671 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21702 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21733 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21764 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21795 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21826 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21857 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21888 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21919 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21950 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21981 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22012 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22043 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22074 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22105 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22136 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22167 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22198 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22229 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22260 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22291 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22322 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22353 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22384 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22415 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22446 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22477 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22508 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22539 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22570 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22600 <row endlastfoot="true">
22601 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22612 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22621 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22638 \begin_layout Subsection
22640 \begin_inset Index idx
22643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22650 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22652 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22659 \begin_layout Standard
22660 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22661 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22662 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22663 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22667 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22670 \begin_layout Standard
22671 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22672 for the column in the table dialog.
22673 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22674 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22678 \begin_layout Standard
22680 \begin_inset Tabular
22681 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22682 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22683 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22684 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22685 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22705 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22774 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22830 This is longer now.
22835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22886 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22887 This is longer now.
22892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22918 \begin_layout Standard
22919 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
22920 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
22924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22925 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
22926 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
22932 Selection with the mouse or with
22936 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
22937 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
22938 the selection from outside the table.
22941 \begin_layout Section
22943 \begin_inset Index idx
22946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22953 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22962 \begin_layout Subsection
22966 \begin_layout Standard
22967 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
22968 have a fixed location.
22970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22977 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
22985 \begin_inset space ~
22990 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
22991 too many notes on the current page.
22994 \begin_layout Standard
22995 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
22996 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
22997 and pages without text.
22998 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
22999 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
23000 Floats are therefore numbered.
23001 Referencing is described in section
23002 \begin_inset space ~
23006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23008 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23015 \begin_layout Standard
23016 To insert a float, use the menu
23018 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23022 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23023 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23025 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23026 \begin_inset Index idx
23029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23035 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23036 paragraph within the float.
23037 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23038 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23039 left-clicking on the box label.
23040 A closed float box looks like this:
23041 \begin_inset Graphics
23042 filename clipart/float.png
23047 – a gray button with a red label.
23050 \begin_layout Standard
23051 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23053 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23056 \begin_layout Subsection
23058 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23060 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23065 \begin_inset Index idx
23068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23069 Floats ! Figure floats
23077 \begin_layout Standard
23079 \begin_inset space ~
23083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23085 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23089 was created using the menu
23091 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23092 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23098 arg "float-insert figure"
23102 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23105 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23111 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23115 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23116 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23118 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23120 \begin_inset space ~
23128 arg "layout-paragraph"
23134 \begin_layout Standard
23135 \begin_inset Float figure
23140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23142 \begin_inset Graphics
23143 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23153 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23156 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23158 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23162 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
23175 \begin_layout Standard
23176 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23177 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23179 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23188 ) and refer to it using the menu
23190 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23196 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23200 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23201 vague references like
23202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23209 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23210 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23220 For more about cross-references, see section
23221 \begin_inset space ~
23225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23227 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23234 \begin_layout Standard
23235 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23236 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23237 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23238 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23239 as described in section
23240 \begin_inset space ~
23244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23246 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23252 \begin_inset space ~
23256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23258 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23262 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23263 You can also set the images one below the other.
23265 \begin_inset space ~
23269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23271 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23278 reference "fig:Platypus"
23282 are the subfigures.
23285 \begin_layout Standard
23286 \begin_inset Float figure
23291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23292 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23296 \begin_inset Float figure
23301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23302 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23305 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23307 name "fig:Undefinable"
23319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23320 \begin_inset Graphics
23321 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
23332 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23336 \begin_inset Float figure
23341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23342 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23347 name "fig:Platypus"
23359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23360 \begin_inset Graphics
23361 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23373 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23380 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23385 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23389 Two distorted images.
23402 \begin_layout Subsection
23404 \begin_inset Index idx
23407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23408 Floats ! Table floats
23416 \begin_layout Standard
23417 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23419 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23420 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23423 or the toolbar button
23426 arg "float-insert table"
23430 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23431 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23432 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23434 \begin_inset space ~
23438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23440 reference "tab:Table-float"
23447 \begin_layout Standard
23448 \begin_inset Float table
23453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23454 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23459 name "tab:Table-float"
23471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23473 \begin_inset Tabular
23474 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23475 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23476 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23477 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23478 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23605 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23626 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23629 \end{array}\right]$
23637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23650 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23671 \begin_layout Subsection
23673 \begin_inset Index idx
23676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23685 \begin_layout Standard
23687 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23688 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23689 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23691 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23699 \begin_inset space ~
23707 \begin_layout Section
23709 \begin_inset Index idx
23712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23721 \begin_layout Standard
23723 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23725 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23726 \begin_inset space \space{}
23733 \begin_layout Standard
23734 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23735 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23737 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23741 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23742 and its alignment within the page.
23745 \begin_layout Standard
23747 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23757 height_special "totalheight"
23762 backgroundcolor "none"
23765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23768 This is a minipage.
23769 The text is set in an italic style.
23772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23775 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23776 another formatting.
23784 \begin_layout Standard
23785 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23788 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23792 as described in section
23793 \begin_inset space ~
23797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23799 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23804 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23810 \begin_layout Standard
23811 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23821 height_special "totalheight"
23826 backgroundcolor "none"
23829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23830 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23831 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23837 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23841 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23851 height_special "totalheight"
23856 backgroundcolor "none"
23859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23860 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23861 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23869 \begin_layout Standard
23870 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23876 \begin_layout Standard
23877 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23879 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23886 \begin_inset space ~
23894 \begin_layout Chapter
23895 Mathematical Formulas
23896 \begin_inset Index idx
23899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23906 \begin_inset Index idx
23909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23938 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23940 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
23947 \begin_layout Standard
23948 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
23953 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
23956 \begin_layout Section
23958 \begin_inset Index idx
23961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23970 \begin_layout Standard
23971 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
23984 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
23986 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
23987 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
23988 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
23990 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23996 \begin_layout Standard
23997 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
24001 \begin_inset space ~
24006 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24009 \begin_layout Standard
24010 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24011 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24014 \begin_layout Standard
24015 This is a line with an inline formula
24016 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24022 \begin_layout Standard
24023 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24024 paragraph, like this one:
24025 \begin_inset Formula
24032 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24035 \begin_layout Standard
24037 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24039 For example, typing
24040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24053 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24054 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24058 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24061 \begin_inset space ~
24069 \begin_layout Subsection
24070 Navigating in Formulas
24071 \begin_inset Index idx
24074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24083 \begin_layout Standard
24084 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24085 achieved with the arrow keys.
24087 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24088 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24093 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24094 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24098 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24102 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24105 \end{array}\right]$
24113 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24118 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24119 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24122 \begin_layout Standard
24127 , printed in this document as
24128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24132 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24139 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24140 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24141 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24146 For example, if you want
24147 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24155 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24165 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24169 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24174 , since in the latter case only the
24177 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24182 will be under the square root sign:
24183 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24189 \begin_layout Standard
24190 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24192 \begin_inset Formula
24194 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24203 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24204 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24207 \begin_layout Subsection
24211 \begin_layout Standard
24212 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24213 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24217 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24218 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24219 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24220 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24221 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24225 \begin_layout Subsection
24226 Exponents and Subscripts
24227 \begin_inset Index idx
24230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24237 \begin_inset Index idx
24240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24249 \begin_layout Standard
24250 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24253 arg "math-superscript"
24259 arg "math-subscript"
24262 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24264 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24267 , type in a formula
24270 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24280 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24286 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24290 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24296 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24302 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24311 , you have to use an extra
24315 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24316 For example, if you want
24317 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24323 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24329 Subscripts are similar: To get
24330 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24336 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24344 \begin_layout Subsection
24346 \begin_inset Index idx
24349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24358 \begin_layout Standard
24359 Create a fraction either with the command
24365 or by using the icon
24368 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24374 \begin_inset space ~
24380 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24381 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24382 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24387 To move back up, press
24392 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24393 \begin_inset Formula
24395 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24398 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24406 \begin_layout Subsection
24408 \begin_inset Index idx
24411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24420 \begin_layout Standard
24421 Roots can be created using the
24424 \begin_inset space ~
24432 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24438 arg "math-insert \\root"
24460 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24466 always produces a square root.
24469 \begin_layout Subsection
24470 Operators with Limits
24471 \begin_inset Index idx
24474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24481 \begin_inset Index idx
24484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24491 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24493 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24500 \begin_layout Standard
24502 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24506 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24509 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24510 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24511 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24512 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24513 The sum operator will automatically place its
24514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24521 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24523 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24527 \begin_inset Formula
24529 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24534 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24538 \begin_layout Standard
24539 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24541 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24542 behind the operator and using the menu
24544 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24545 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24547 \begin_inset space ~
24551 \begin_inset space ~
24565 \begin_layout Standard
24566 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24575 \begin_inset Index idx
24578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24585 \begin_inset Formula
24587 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24592 which will place the
24593 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24605 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24606 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24612 \begin_layout Standard
24613 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24620 Have a look at section
24621 \begin_inset space ~
24625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24627 reference "subsec:Functions"
24631 for an explanation of function macros.
24634 \begin_layout Subsection
24636 \begin_inset Index idx
24639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24648 \begin_layout Standard
24649 Most math symbols can be found in the
24652 \begin_inset space ~
24657 under one of several categories; including
24674 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24678 \begin_layout Standard
24679 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24680 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24681 don't have to use the
24684 \begin_inset space ~
24689 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24691 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24694 \begin_layout Subsection
24696 \begin_inset Index idx
24699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24708 \begin_layout Standard
24709 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24715 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24721 \begin_inset space ~
24729 arg "math-insert \\space"
24733 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24734 For example, the sequence
24739 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24742 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24744 \begin_inset Graphics
24745 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24750 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24751 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24752 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24753 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24754 , because they are negative
24756 Here are two examples:
24759 \begin_layout Standard
24769 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24775 \begin_layout Standard
24785 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24791 \begin_layout Subsection
24793 \begin_inset Index idx
24796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24803 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24805 name "subsec:Functions"
24812 \begin_layout Standard
24816 \begin_inset space ~
24821 contains under the button
24824 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24827 a number of function macros, such as
24828 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24832 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24840 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24847 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24848 avoid confusions, because
24849 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24853 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24859 \begin_layout Standard
24860 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24862 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24866 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24872 \begin_layout Standard
24873 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24874 are placed, as described in section
24875 \begin_inset space ~
24879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24881 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24888 \begin_layout Subsection
24890 \begin_inset Index idx
24893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24902 \begin_layout Standard
24903 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
24905 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
24906 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
24907 commands, for example, to enter
24908 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24911 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
24912 Our example is entered by typing
24917 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24924 \begin_inset space ~
24928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24930 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
24934 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
24937 \begin_layout Standard
24938 \begin_inset Float table
24943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24944 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24947 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24949 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
24953 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
24961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24963 \begin_inset Tabular
24964 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
24965 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24966 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24967 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24968 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25052 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25106 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25160 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25214 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25268 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25322 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25376 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25430 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25484 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25529 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25550 \begin_layout Standard
25551 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25554 \begin_inset space ~
25562 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25565 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25569 \begin_layout Section
25570 Brackets and Delimiters
25571 \begin_inset Index idx
25574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25581 \begin_inset Index idx
25584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25591 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25593 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25600 \begin_layout Standard
25601 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25603 For some purposes, using just the keys
25608 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25609 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25610 toolbar delimiter icon
25613 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25617 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25618 \begin_inset Formula
25620 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25628 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25629 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25633 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25636 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25642 \begin_inset Formula
25644 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25652 \begin_layout Standard
25653 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25654 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25658 \begin_layout Standard
25659 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25660 left side and right side.
25661 If you use the option
25664 \begin_inset space ~
25669 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25670 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25672 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25677 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25678 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25681 \begin_layout Standard
25682 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25683 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25684 is to go inside the brackets.
25685 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25690 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25691 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25692 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25696 arg "math-delim ( )"
25702 \begin_layout Section
25703 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25704 \begin_inset Index idx
25707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25714 \begin_inset Index idx
25717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25724 \begin_inset Index idx
25727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25728 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25736 \begin_layout Standard
25737 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25741 \begin_inset space ~
25749 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25753 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25754 Here is an example:
25755 \begin_inset Formula
25757 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25766 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25767 \begin_inset space ~
25771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25773 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25778 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25779 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25780 This alignment is set in the box
25785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25834 for every column as default.
25835 For example, the sequence
25836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25847 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25848 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25849 corresponds to the relevant column.
25850 The result will look like this:
25851 \begin_inset Formula
25854 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25855 column & has & has\,right\\
25856 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25865 \begin_layout Standard
25866 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25869 arg "newline-insert newline"
25872 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25873 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25875 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25878 or the math toolbar.
25881 \begin_layout Standard
25882 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25883 It can be created with the menu
25885 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25886 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25888 \begin_inset space ~
25900 Here is an example:
25901 \begin_inset Formula
25915 \begin_layout Standard
25916 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25919 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
25922 arg "newline-insert newline"
25926 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
25931 arg "newline-insert newline"
25934 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
25935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25942 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
25943 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
25944 A new row is created by every further entry of
25947 arg "newline-insert newline"
25951 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
25952 Here is an example:
25953 \begin_inset Formula
25955 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
25956 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
25961 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
25962 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
25963 \begin_inset Formula
25965 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
25973 \begin_layout Standard
25974 The multi-line formula type described here is called
25981 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
25982 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
25983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25985 reference "eq:asquared"
25990 The other types are described in section
25991 \begin_inset space ~
25995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25997 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26004 \begin_layout Section
26005 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26006 \begin_inset Index idx
26009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26010 Math ! Formula numbering
26016 \begin_inset Index idx
26019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26020 Math ! Referencing formulas
26026 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26028 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26035 \begin_layout Standard
26036 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26038 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26039 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26041 \begin_inset space ~
26045 \begin_inset space ~
26053 arg "math-number-toggle"
26057 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26058 within parentheses.
26059 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26060 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26061 the document class.
26062 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26063 separated by a dot:
26064 \begin_inset Formula
26074 arg "math-number-toggle"
26077 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26078 You can only number displayed formulas.
26081 \begin_layout Standard
26082 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26084 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26085 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26087 \begin_inset space ~
26091 \begin_inset space ~
26099 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26102 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26103 \begin_inset Formula
26106 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26112 To number all lines use the shortcut
26115 arg "math-number-toggle"
26121 \begin_layout Standard
26122 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26125 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26126 A label is inserted with the menu
26128 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26137 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26138 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26139 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26151 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26152 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26153 We inserted in the following example the label
26154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26161 in the second line:
26162 \begin_inset Formula
26164 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26165 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26170 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26171 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26172 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26174 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26176 \begin_inset space ~
26184 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26188 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26189 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26190 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26191 as the formula number:
26194 \begin_layout Standard
26195 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26198 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26205 \begin_layout Standard
26206 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26207 's cross-reference box are described in section
26208 \begin_inset space ~
26212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26214 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26219 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26227 \begin_layout Section
26228 User defined math macros
26229 \begin_inset Index idx
26232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26241 \begin_layout Standard
26243 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26244 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26245 Math macros are explained in section
26248 \begin_inset space ~
26260 \begin_layout Section
26264 \begin_layout Subsection
26266 \begin_inset Index idx
26269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26278 \begin_layout Standard
26279 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26280 To set a font in a formula, use the
26283 \begin_inset space ~
26291 arg "math-insert \\font"
26294 , or enter its command, listed in table
26295 \begin_inset space ~
26299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26301 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26308 \begin_layout Standard
26309 \begin_inset Float table
26314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26315 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26320 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26324 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26334 \begin_inset Tabular
26335 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26336 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26337 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26338 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26370 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26397 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26424 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26457 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26484 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26511 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26545 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26572 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26606 \begin_layout Standard
26607 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26615 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26631 \begin_layout Standard
26632 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26633 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26638 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26639 space when you need a space in the box.
26640 Here is an example where
26641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26652 denotes the set of numbers:
26653 \begin_inset Formula
26655 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26663 \begin_layout Standard
26664 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26665 You can, for example, put a character in
26674 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26678 \begin_inset Newline newline
26681 So it is better not to use this feature.
26684 \begin_layout Standard
26685 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26686 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26690 \begin_inset Newline newline
26693 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26699 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26700 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26706 \begin_layout Standard
26713 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26716 \begin_layout Standard
26717 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26719 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26720 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26722 \begin_inset space ~
26730 \begin_layout Subsection
26732 \begin_inset Index idx
26735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26744 \begin_layout Standard
26745 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26747 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26751 \begin_inset space ~
26755 \begin_inset space ~
26763 \begin_inset space ~
26771 arg "math-insert \\font"
26775 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26776 in black instead of blue.
26777 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26778 Here is an example:
26779 \begin_inset Formula
26782 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26783 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26792 \begin_layout Subsection
26794 \begin_inset Index idx
26797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26806 \begin_layout Standard
26807 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26808 automatically chosen in most situations.
26826 For most characters,
26834 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26835 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26840 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26841 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26842 thinks are appropriate.
26843 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26846 arg "math-insert \\style"
26850 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26851 For example, you can set
26852 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26855 , which is normally in
26864 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26868 The four styles are used in the following example:
26871 \begin_layout Standard
26872 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26876 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26880 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26884 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
26890 \begin_layout Standard
26891 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
26892 is set in a particular size with the menu
26894 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26896 \begin_inset space ~
26901 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
26902 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
26903 will be adjusted to correspond.
26904 As an example here is a formula in the font size
26905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26915 \begin_layout Standard
26919 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
26925 \begin_layout Section
26926 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26928 \begin_inset Index idx
26931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26938 \begin_inset Index idx
26941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26950 \begin_layout Standard
26952 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
26953 that are in common use.
26956 \begin_layout Subsection
26957 Enabling AMS-Support
26960 \begin_layout Standard
26961 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
26962 the document by selecting the checkbox
26965 \begin_inset space ~
26969 \begin_inset space ~
26973 \begin_inset space ~
26980 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26984 \begin_inset Index idx
26987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26988 Document ! Settings
26996 \begin_inset space ~
27002 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27003 -errors in formulas,
27004 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27007 \begin_layout Subsection
27009 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27011 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27016 \begin_inset Index idx
27019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27020 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27028 \begin_layout Standard
27029 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27030 provides a selection of different formula types.
27032 allows you to choose between
27053 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27054 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27060 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27063 \begin_layout Chapter
27067 \begin_layout Section
27069 \begin_inset Index idx
27072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27079 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27081 name "sec:Cross-References"
27088 \begin_layout Standard
27089 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27090 's strengths is cross-references.
27091 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27093 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27094 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27095 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27098 \begin_layout Enumerate
27102 \begin_layout Enumerate
27103 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27105 name "enu:Second-item"
27112 \begin_layout Enumerate
27116 \begin_layout Standard
27117 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27119 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27122 or by pressing the toolbar button
27129 A gray label box like this:
27130 \begin_inset Graphics
27131 filename clipart/label.png
27135 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27137 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27172 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27173 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27189 \begin_layout Standard
27190 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27192 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27195 or the toolbar button
27198 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27202 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27203 \begin_inset Graphics
27204 filename clipart/reference.png
27208 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27210 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27223 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27227 \begin_layout Standard
27228 As an alternative to
27230 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27233 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27238 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27239 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27241 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27253 \begin_layout Standard
27254 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27255 \begin_inset space ~
27259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27261 reference "enu:Second-item"
27268 \begin_layout Standard
27269 It is recommended to use a protected space
27273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27274 described in section
27275 \begin_inset space ~
27279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27281 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27290 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27291 line breaks between them.
27294 \begin_layout Standard
27295 There are six formats of cross-references:
27298 \begin_layout Description
27299 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27302 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27309 \begin_layout Description
27310 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27311 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27323 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27330 \begin_layout Description
27331 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27332 \begin_inset space ~
27336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27337 LatexCommand pageref
27338 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27345 \begin_layout Description
27347 \begin_inset space ~
27351 \begin_inset space ~
27354 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27356 LatexCommand vpageref
27357 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27362 \begin_inset Newline newline
27365 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27366 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27367 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27368 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27369 it prints “on the next page”.
27370 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27373 \begin_layout Description
27375 \begin_inset space ~
27379 \begin_inset space ~
27383 \begin_inset space ~
27386 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27389 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27394 \begin_inset Newline newline
27397 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27403 ; otherwise it behaves like
27407 \begin_inset space ~
27411 \begin_inset space ~
27420 \begin_layout Description
27422 \begin_inset space ~
27425 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27426 \begin_inset Newline newline
27430 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27438 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27448 \begin_inset Index idx
27451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27453 -packages ! prettyref
27459 \begin_inset Index idx
27462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27464 -packages ! refstyle
27475 \begin_inset Newline newline
27478 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27479 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27482 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27486 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27487 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27495 is the default and preferred because
27499 supports only English documents.
27500 The format is specified by using the command
27512 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27513 preamble of the document.
27514 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27527 ) can be done with this command
27528 \begin_inset Newline newline
27535 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27540 \begin_inset Newline newline
27543 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
27545 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27547 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27554 \begin_layout Description
27556 \begin_inset space ~
27559 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27561 LatexCommand nameref
27562 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27569 \begin_layout Standard
27570 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
27571 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27573 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27577 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27581 \begin_layout Standard
27582 You can only use the style
27586 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27590 is always possible.
27593 \begin_layout Standard
27594 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27595 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27597 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27598 \begin_inset space ~
27602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27604 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27611 \begin_layout Standard
27612 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27616 \begin_inset space ~
27620 \begin_inset space ~
27625 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27626 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27629 \begin_inset space ~
27634 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27635 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27638 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27644 \begin_layout Standard
27645 You can change labels at any time.
27646 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27647 do not need to think about this.
27650 \begin_layout Standard
27651 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27653 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27657 \begin_layout Standard
27658 References are described in detail in the section
27659 \begin_inset space ~
27669 \begin_inset space ~
27677 \begin_layout Section
27678 Table of Contents and other Listings
27679 \begin_inset Index idx
27682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27689 \begin_inset Index idx
27692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27693 Navigating ! Outline
27699 \begin_inset Index idx
27702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27718 \begin_layout Subsection
27720 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27722 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27729 \begin_layout Standard
27730 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27732 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27733 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27735 \begin_inset space ~
27739 \begin_inset space ~
27745 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27747 If you click on it, the
27751 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27752 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27753 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27755 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27757 \begin_inset space ~
27762 that is described in section
27763 \begin_inset space ~
27767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27769 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27776 \begin_layout Standard
27777 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
27778 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
27780 \begin_inset space ~
27784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27786 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
27790 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
27792 \begin_inset space ~
27796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27798 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
27802 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
27804 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
27807 \begin_layout Subsection
27808 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
27809 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27811 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
27818 \begin_layout Standard
27819 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
27821 You can insert them via the
27823 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27827 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
27830 \begin_layout Section
27831 URLs and Hyperlinks
27832 \begin_inset Index idx
27835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27842 \begin_inset Index idx
27845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27854 \begin_layout Subsection
27856 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27865 \begin_layout Standard
27866 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
27868 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27874 \begin_layout Standard
27875 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
27877 \begin_inset Flex URL
27880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27890 \begin_layout Standard
27891 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
27897 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
27901 \begin_layout Standard
27902 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27910 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27919 \begin_layout Subsection
27921 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27923 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
27930 \begin_layout Standard
27931 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
27933 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27936 or with the toolbar button
27943 The appearing dialog has two fields:
27952 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
27953 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
27954 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27956 name "LyX's homepage"
27957 target "http://www.lyx.org"
27961 , an Email address like this:
27962 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27964 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
27965 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
27970 , or a link to a file.
27973 \begin_layout Standard
27974 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
27976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27987 to the link target.
27990 \begin_layout Standard
27991 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
27992 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
27993 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
27994 the text style dialog.
27995 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
27999 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28001 name "LyX's homepage"
28002 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28009 \begin_layout Standard
28010 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28014 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28016 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28017 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28021 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28023 \begin_inset Newline newline
28031 \begin_inset Newline newline
28038 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28041 \begin_layout Section
28043 \begin_inset Index idx
28046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28053 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28055 name "sec:Appendices"
28062 \begin_layout Standard
28063 Appendices are created with the menu
28065 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28067 \begin_inset space ~
28071 \begin_inset space ~
28077 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28078 as the appendix part of the book.
28079 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28082 \begin_layout Standard
28083 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28084 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28085 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28086 and the subsection number.
28087 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28091 \begin_layout Standard
28093 \begin_inset space ~
28097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28099 reference "chap:Credits"
28104 \begin_inset space ~
28108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28110 reference "subsec:Export"
28117 \begin_layout Section
28119 \begin_inset Index idx
28122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28129 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28131 name "sec:Bibliography"
28138 \begin_layout Standard
28139 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28141 You can include a bibliography database,
28145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28146 Known under the name
28147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28150 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28160 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
28161 manually, using the paragraph environment
28165 , which was described in section
28166 \begin_inset space ~
28170 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28172 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28177 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28178 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
28182 use a bibliography database.
28185 \begin_layout Subsection
28186 The Bibliography Environment
28189 \begin_layout Standard
28194 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28196 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28205 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28207 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28217 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28220 \begin_layout Standard
28221 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28223 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28226 or the toolbar button
28229 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28233 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28234 containing the available citations.
28235 Select one or more keys from the list and
28245 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28246 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28250 \begin_layout Standard
28251 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
28252 entry with surrounding brackets.
28257 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
28258 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28270 \begin_layout Standard
28274 Companion Second Edition
28277 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28279 key "latexcompanion"
28286 \begin_layout Standard
28287 The \SpecialChar LyX
28288 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28289 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28298 \begin_layout Standard
28299 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28302 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28304 \begin_inset space ~
28312 arg "layout-paragraph"
28316 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28319 \begin_layout Subsection
28320 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28322 \begin_inset Index idx
28325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28326 Bibliography ! Databases
28332 \begin_inset Index idx
28335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28336 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28345 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28352 \begin_layout Standard
28353 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
28358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28359 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28361 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28362 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28367 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28369 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28370 your working field in a database.
28371 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28372 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28373 list for that document.
28374 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28378 \begin_layout Standard
28379 The database is a text file with the file extension
28380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28391 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28392 The format is explained in
28393 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28399 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28401 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28403 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28408 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28409 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28410 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28412 \begin_inset Flex URL
28415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28417 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28425 \begin_layout Standard
28426 To use a database, use the menu
28428 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28433 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28435 \begin_inset space ~
28441 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
28442 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
28449 Add bibliography to TOC
28451 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28456 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28457 in the document or just the cited references.
28460 \begin_layout Standard
28461 The style file is a text file with the file extension
28462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28473 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
28474 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28475 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
28476 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
28478 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
28483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28484 For information on how this is done, have a look at
28485 \begin_inset Newline newline
28489 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28491 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
28503 \begin_layout Standard
28504 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
28507 \begin_layout Standard
28508 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
28509 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28511 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
28518 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28519 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28524 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
28525 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
28526 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
28530 The following variants are possible:
28533 \begin_layout Description
28534 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
28535 with other bibliography packages (e.
28536 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28540 \begin_inset space \space{}
28547 ), only with the package
28551 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
28555 \begin_layout Description
28556 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
28557 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
28558 with all bibliography packages, except
28563 \begin_layout Description
28564 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
28569 , works with all bibliography packages
28572 \begin_layout Standard
28573 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28574 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
28576 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
28579 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28583 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28592 \begin_layout Standard
28593 When you select the option
28595 Sectioned bibliography
28599 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28600 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28603 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
28604 This and other options are explained in detail in section
28606 Customizing Bibliographies
28610 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28615 Additional Features
28620 \begin_layout Standard
28621 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
28622 the two methods of creating them.
28623 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28624 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28625 We used the style file
28629 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
28632 \begin_layout Subsection
28634 \begin_inset Index idx
28637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28638 Bibliography ! Citation format
28646 \begin_layout Standard
28647 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
28648 For this feature you need to enable the option
28654 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28658 \begin_inset Index idx
28661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28662 Document ! Settings
28672 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
28673 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28674 style files as explained in
28675 the previous section.
28678 \begin_layout Standard
28679 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
28680 the citation reference window.
28681 Here is an example where the text
28682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28686 \begin_inset space ~
28690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28693 appears after the reference:
28696 \begin_layout Standard
28698 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28701 key "latexcompanion"
28708 \begin_layout Section
28710 \begin_inset Index idx
28713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28720 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28729 \begin_layout Standard
28730 An index entry is created if you use the menu
28732 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28734 \begin_inset space ~
28739 or the toolbar button
28746 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
28747 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
28748 by \SpecialChar LyX
28749 as the index entry.
28752 \begin_layout Standard
28753 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
28755 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28756 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28758 \begin_inset space ~
28764 A light blue box labeled
28765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28776 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
28777 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
28781 \begin_layout Standard
28782 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
28783 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
28784 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
28785 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28787 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28789 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
28796 \begin_layout Subsection
28797 Grouping Index Entries
28798 \begin_inset Index idx
28801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28810 \begin_layout Standard
28811 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
28813 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
28814 lists under the entry
28815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28823 First we create the entry
28824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28832 \begin_inset space ~
28836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28838 reference "subsec:Lists"
28843 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
28844 \begin_inset space ~
28848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28850 reference "sec:Itemize"
28854 , we insert the command
28857 \begin_layout Standard
28863 \begin_layout Standard
28867 \begin_layout Standard
28873 \begin_layout Standard
28874 for the enumerated list in section
28875 \begin_inset space ~
28879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28881 reference "sec:Enumerate"
28888 \begin_layout Standard
28889 The exclamation mark
28890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28897 marks the grouping levels.
28898 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
28899 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
28900 If we don't have an index entry for
28901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28908 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
28911 \begin_layout Subsection
28913 \begin_inset Index idx
28916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28917 Index ! Page ranges
28925 \begin_layout Standard
28926 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
28928 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
28929 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
28930 an index entry in section
28931 \begin_inset space ~
28935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28937 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
28944 \begin_layout Standard
28947 Paragraph environments|(
28950 \begin_layout Standard
28951 and another entry at the end of section
28952 \begin_inset space ~
28956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28958 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
28965 \begin_layout Standard
28968 Paragraph environments|)
28971 \begin_layout Standard
28973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28996 respectively start and end the index range.
28997 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
28998 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
28999 the pages of the indexed document parts.
29000 An example is the index entry
29001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29004 Document ! Settings
29005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29011 \begin_layout Subsection
29013 \begin_inset Index idx
29016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29017 Index ! Cross referencing
29025 \begin_layout Standard
29026 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
29027 We referred for example in the index entry
29028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29036 \begin_inset space ~
29040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29042 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
29046 ) to the index entry
29047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29054 in the same section using the entry
29057 \begin_layout Standard
29060 GIF|see{Image formats}
29063 \begin_layout Standard
29064 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
29066 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
29067 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
29070 \begin_layout Subsection
29072 \begin_inset Index idx
29075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29076 Index ! Entry order
29084 \begin_layout Standard
29085 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
29086 follow the rules for the index order.
29087 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
29092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29093 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
29095 \begin_inset space ~
29099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29101 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
29110 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
29111 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
29112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29136 \begin_inset Index idx
29139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29140 Dummy entries ! maïs
29146 \begin_inset Index idx
29149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29150 Dummy entries ! maître
29156 \begin_inset Index idx
29159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29160 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
29165 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
29166 maïs, maison, maître.
29167 To achieve this, we use the command
29170 \begin_layout Standard
29173 previous entry@current entry
29176 \begin_layout Standard
29177 In our case we want to have
29178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29193 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
29196 \begin_layout Standard
29202 \begin_layout Standard
29203 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
29204 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
29206 See the next subsection for an example.
29209 \begin_layout Standard
29210 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29216 \begin_layout Standard
29217 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
29222 to generate the index (see section
29223 \begin_inset space ~
29227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29229 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
29238 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29239 -package aeguill in section
29240 \begin_inset space ~
29244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29246 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
29250 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
29251 -packages although all these index
29252 commands start with
29253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29266 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
29271 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
29274 \begin_layout Standard
29286 \begin_layout Standard
29298 \begin_layout Subsection
29300 \begin_inset Index idx
29303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29304 Index ! Entry layout
29312 \begin_layout Standard
29313 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
29314 \begin_inset Index idx
29317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29320 This is an italic dummy entry
29325 You can also format the page number using the character
29326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29333 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
29334 -command without a backslash.
29335 We can write for example
29338 \begin_layout Standard
29341 italic page number:|textit
29344 \begin_layout Standard
29345 to get the page number in italic.
29346 \begin_inset Index idx
29349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29350 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
29355 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
29356 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
29358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29374 \begin_inset space ~
29380 Have a look at section
29381 \begin_inset space ~
29385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29387 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29391 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29395 \begin_layout Standard
29396 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29404 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
29408 to generate the index, see section
29409 \begin_inset space ~
29413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29415 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
29424 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
29429 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
29430 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29433 key "latexcompanion"
29445 \begin_layout Standard
29446 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
29448 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
29449 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
29450 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
29451 If so, put the following in the preamble
29454 \begin_layout Standard
29466 \begin_layout Standard
29470 \begin_layout Standard
29476 \begin_layout Standard
29477 in the index entry.
29478 \begin_inset Index idx
29481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29482 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
29487 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
29488 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
29489 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
29492 \begin_layout Standard
29493 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
29494 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
29495 a bold font for all index entries.
29496 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
29508 documentation for details,
29509 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29511 key "makeindex,xindy"
29518 \begin_layout Subsection
29520 \begin_inset Index idx
29523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29530 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29532 name "subsec:Index-Program"
29539 \begin_layout Standard
29540 If the index generation program
29544 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
29545 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
29549 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29550 distribution, is used.
29554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29559 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
29560 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
29561 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
29562 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
29563 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
29573 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
29575 dialog, see section
29576 \begin_inset space ~
29580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29582 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29587 The available options are listed and explained in
29588 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29590 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
29595 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
29599 \begin_layout Standard
29600 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
29601 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
29604 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29605 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29609 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
29610 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
29613 \begin_layout Subsection
29617 \begin_layout Standard
29618 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
29619 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
29620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29627 next to the standard index.
29629 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
29630 that add this feature.
29637 \begin_inset Index idx
29640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29642 -packages ! splitidx
29647 package to generate multiple indexes.
29648 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
29653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29654 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
29656 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29663 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
29664 style, but it also includes
29665 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
29666 Please consult the package's manual for details.
29674 \begin_layout Standard
29675 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
29676 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
29678 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29679 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29682 and select the option
29684 Use multiple Indexes
29691 already contains the standard index
29692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29700 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
29701 also appear as a heading) to the
29705 input field and press the
29710 The new index now also appears in the list.
29711 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
29712 label color to the new index.
29715 \begin_layout Standard
29716 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
29719 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29726 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
29727 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
29728 are additional features:
29731 \begin_layout Itemize
29732 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
29733 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
29736 \begin_layout Itemize
29737 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
29738 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
29739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29746 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
29747 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
29748 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
29749 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
29752 \begin_layout Section
29753 Nomenclature/Glossary
29754 \begin_inset Index idx
29757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29764 \begin_inset Index idx
29767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29796 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29798 name "sec:Nomenclature"
29805 \begin_layout Standard
29806 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
29807 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
29808 called nomenclature or glossary.
29811 \begin_layout Standard
29812 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29819 \begin_inset Index idx
29822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29824 -packages ! nomencl
29830 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
29832 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29838 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29842 \begin_layout Standard
29843 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
29844 and then use the menu
29846 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29852 \begin_inset space ~
29857 or the toolbar button
29860 arg "nomencl-insert"
29865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29876 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
29879 \begin_layout Standard
29880 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
29881 The first is the term or
29885 that you wish to define.
29890 of the term or symbol.
29893 \begin_layout Standard
29894 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29902 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
29903 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
29911 \begin_layout Subsection
29912 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
29913 \begin_inset Index idx
29916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29917 Nomenclature ! Layout
29925 \begin_layout Standard
29926 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
29930 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
29933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29937 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29945 \begin_inset Newline newline
29953 \begin_inset Newline newline
29959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29966 character starts/ends the formula.
29967 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
29968 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
29970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29980 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
29990 \begin_layout Standard
29991 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29992 -syntax is given in section
29993 \begin_inset space ~
29997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29999 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30006 \begin_layout Standard
30010 \begin_inset space ~
30015 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
30017 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
30018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30022 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
30026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30029 in this document is:
30030 \begin_inset Newline newline
30035 dummy entry for the character
30040 \begin_inset Newline newline
30052 \begin_inset space ~
30062 font use the command
30091 \begin_layout Standard
30092 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
30093 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30097 \begin_inset space \space{}
30101 \begin_inset Newline newline
30117 \begin_inset Newline newline
30120 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
30121 This command will make the font of all symbols
30128 \begin_inset space ~
30136 \begin_layout Standard
30137 If the characters |
30138 \begin_inset space \space{}
30142 \begin_inset space \space{}
30146 \begin_inset space \space{}
30150 \begin_inset space \space{}
30154 \begin_inset space \space{}
30157 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
30158 a quote character in front of them.
30159 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
30160 LatexCommand nomenclature
30161 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
30162 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
30169 \begin_layout Subsection
30170 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
30171 \begin_inset Index idx
30174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30175 Nomenclature ! Sort order
30183 \begin_layout Standard
30184 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30185 -code of the symbol
30187 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
30189 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
30192 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
30193 LatexCommand nomenclature
30195 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
30202 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
30206 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
30207 LatexCommand nomenclature
30210 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
30215 They will be sorted by
30216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30242 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
30245 will be sorted before the
30249 since the character
30250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30257 is considered in sorting.
30260 \begin_layout Standard
30261 To control the sort order, you can edit the
30264 \begin_inset space ~
30269 field of the nomenclature dialog.
30270 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
30272 For the example given, you can insert
30276 in this field for the
30277 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
30284 will be located before
30285 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
30291 \begin_layout Standard
30292 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
30297 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30306 \begin_layout Subsection
30307 Nomenclature Options
30308 \begin_inset Index idx
30311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30312 Nomenclature ! Options
30320 \begin_layout Standard
30325 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
30326 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
30329 \begin_layout Description
30330 refeq Appends the phrase
30331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30346 to every nomenclature entry, where
30352 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
30355 \begin_layout Description
30356 refpage Appends the phrase
30357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30372 to every nomenclature entry, where
30378 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
30381 \begin_layout Description
30382 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
30385 \begin_layout Standard
30386 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
30387 class options list in the
30389 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30393 In this document the options
30400 \begin_layout Standard
30401 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30407 \begin_layout Standard
30408 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
30409 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
30414 field in the nomenclature dialog:
30417 \begin_layout Description
30427 \begin_layout Description
30430 nomrefpage Like the
30437 \begin_layout Description
30440 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
30449 \begin_layout Description
30453 \begin_inset space ~
30459 \begin_inset space ~
30464 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
30467 \begin_layout Standard
30469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30476 are automatically translated for some document languages.
30477 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30481 \begin_layout Standard
30489 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
30492 \begin_inset Newline newline
30499 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
30504 \begin_inset Newline newline
30508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30523 by their translation.
30526 \begin_layout Subsection
30527 Printing the Nomenclature
30528 \begin_inset Index idx
30531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30532 Nomenclature ! Printing
30540 \begin_layout Standard
30541 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
30543 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30544 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30560 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
30561 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
30562 You can choose between these settings:
30565 \begin_layout Description
30566 Default a space of 1
30567 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30573 \begin_layout Description
30575 \begin_inset space ~
30579 \begin_inset space ~
30582 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
30585 \begin_layout Description
30586 Custom custom space
30589 \begin_layout Standard
30590 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
30591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30599 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
30607 For example, in order to change the name to
30611 , add the following line to the preamble:
30614 \begin_layout Standard
30622 nomname}{List of Symbols}
30625 \begin_layout Subsection
30626 Nomenclature Program
30627 \begin_inset Index idx
30630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30631 Nomenclature ! Program
30637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30639 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
30646 \begin_layout Standard
30652 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30653 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
30655 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
30660 by adding options, see section
30661 \begin_inset space ~
30665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30667 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30672 The available options are listed and explained in
30673 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30675 key "nomencl,makeindex"
30682 \begin_layout Section
30684 \begin_inset Index idx
30687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30694 \begin_inset Index idx
30697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30698 Document ! Branches
30704 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30706 name "sec:Branches"
30713 \begin_layout Standard
30714 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
30715 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
30716 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
30717 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
30720 \begin_layout Standard
30721 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
30722 allows you to put text into branches.
30723 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
30724 To create a branch, either select the menu
30726 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30727 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
30730 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
30732 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30739 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
30740 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
30741 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
30742 and whether the name of the branch should
30743 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
30744 (see below for an example).
30745 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
30746 to the name of the other) and to add
30747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30755 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30759 \begin_inset space ~
30762 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
30763 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
30766 \begin_layout Standard
30767 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
30768 These boxes are inserted via the menu
30770 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30773 where you can choose a branch.
30774 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
30778 \begin_layout Standard
30779 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
30780 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
30783 \begin_layout Standard
30784 \begin_inset Branch Question
30788 \begin_layout Standard
30789 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
30797 \begin_layout Standard
30798 \begin_inset Branch Answer
30802 \begin_layout Standard
30803 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
30811 \begin_layout Standard
30818 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30819 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30822 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
30823 Consider for example a file
30824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30831 which has the above branches.
30833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30840 is active, the PDF export file would be called
30841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30864 branch were inactive,
30865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30880 branch was active, likewise
30881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30896 branch was active, and
30897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30900 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
30901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30904 if both branches were active.
30905 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
30906 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296009
30910 \begin_layout Standard
30912 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
30913 As of LyX 2.3.0, there are also
30914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30921 branch insets, whose content is output just in case the branch is
30927 \begin_inset Branch Question
30931 \begin_layout Standard
30933 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296217
30934 For example, this material will only appear when the Question branch is
30942 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
30943 To control whether a particular inset is
30944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30951 , right-click on the inset button and choose
30952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30958 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
30960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30964 \change_deleted 424524441 1468296150
30968 \begin_layout Standard
30969 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30975 \begin_layout Standard
30976 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
30977 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
30978 definitions for each branch.
30979 For example you can define for the question branch
30983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30984 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30985 -syntax, see section
30986 \begin_inset space ~
30990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30992 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31004 \begin_layout Standard
31014 \begin_layout Standard
31024 \begin_layout Standard
31025 and for the answer branch
31028 \begin_layout Standard
31038 \begin_layout Standard
31048 \begin_layout Standard
31049 \begin_inset Branch Question
31053 \begin_layout Standard
31057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31085 \begin_layout Standard
31086 \begin_inset Branch Answer
31090 \begin_layout Standard
31094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31122 \begin_layout Standard
31123 Now it is possible to use the
31127 question{\SpecialChar ldots
31134 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
31137 commands to obtain conditional output.
31138 Here is an example formula where only the
31145 \begin_inset Formula
31147 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
31155 \begin_layout Standard
31156 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
31164 \begin_layout Standard
31165 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
31167 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31171 \begin_inset space \space{}
31174 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
31176 For this advanced usage, see the
31182 Flex insets and InsetLayout
31187 \begin_layout Section
31189 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31191 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
31196 \begin_inset Index idx
31199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31208 \begin_layout Standard
31211 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31212 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31215 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
31217 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31223 \begin_inset Index idx
31226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31228 -packages ! hyperref
31233 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
31234 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
31235 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
31236 part of the document.
31240 \begin_layout Standard
31241 The header information in the dialog tab
31245 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
31246 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
31247 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
31248 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
31252 \begin_inset space ~
31256 \begin_inset space ~
31261 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
31262 tries to extract the header information from your document title
31263 and author entries.
31267 \begin_inset space ~
31271 \begin_inset space ~
31275 \begin_inset space ~
31280 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
31283 \begin_layout Standard
31284 You can specify in the dialog tab
31288 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
31293 \begin_inset space ~
31297 \begin_inset space ~
31301 \begin_inset space ~
31306 option allows long links to be split;
31309 \begin_inset space ~
31313 \begin_inset space ~
31317 \begin_inset space ~
31325 \begin_inset space ~
31330 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
31333 \begin_inset space ~
31338 colors the different links.
31339 The default colors are:
31342 \begin_layout Labeling
31343 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
31348 for hyperlinks and URLs
31351 \begin_layout Labeling
31352 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
31360 \begin_layout Labeling
31361 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
31369 \begin_layout Standard
31370 but you can change these in the field
31375 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
31378 \begin_layout Standard
31381 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
31384 \begin_layout Standard
31389 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
31390 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
31391 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
31394 \begin_layout Standard
31399 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
31400 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
31401 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
31411 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
31412 when opening the PDF.
31414 \begin_inset space ~
31417 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
31418 \begin_inset space ~
31421 1 will only display the sections.
31424 \begin_layout Standard
31425 PDF properties are also used in this document.
31426 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
31432 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
31433 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31442 \begin_layout Section
31444 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31446 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31448 name "sec:TeX-Code"
31455 \begin_layout Subsection
31458 \begin_inset Index idx
31461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31469 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31471 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
31478 \begin_layout Standard
31479 As \SpecialChar LyX
31480 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
31481 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
31482 commands and constructs,
31485 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
31486 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
31487 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
31488 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31489 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
31490 cannot support all packages and
31494 \begin_layout Standard
31495 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
31496 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
31497 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
31501 Code box is created by the menu
31503 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31505 \begin_inset space ~
31510 or by the toolbar button
31523 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
31531 \begin_layout Standard
31532 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
31534 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
31536 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
31537 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31544 , you can write the command part
31550 in a \SpecialChar TeX
31551 Code box before the word and the closing brace
31555 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
31556 Code box behind the word.
31557 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
31558 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
31562 \begin_layout Standard
31563 \begin_inset Graphics
31564 filename clipart/ERT.png
31572 \begin_layout Standard
31576 \begin_layout Standard
31577 This is a line with a
31581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31604 \begin_layout Standard
31605 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31613 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31614 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
31615 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
31616 know that the command is finished.
31624 \begin_layout Subsection
31625 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31627 \begin_inset Argument 1
31630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31631 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31638 \begin_inset Index idx
31641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31649 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31651 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31658 \begin_layout Standard
31659 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
31660 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31661 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
31662 uses in the background.
31663 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
31664 is based on commands, you can
31665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31673 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
31674 any time if you know the right commands.
31675 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
31676 is the end of the day.
31677 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
31678 all caption labels bold.
31679 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
31681 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
31685 \begin_layout Standard
31686 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
31688 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31690 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31693 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31702 \begin_layout Standard
31703 As result you find that the package
31708 \begin_inset Index idx
31711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31713 -packages ! caption
31719 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
31721 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31724 \SpecialChar menuseparator
31728 \begin_inset space ~
31736 \begin_layout Standard
31741 usepackage[options]{package name}
31744 \begin_layout Standard
31745 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
31746 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
31747 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
31748 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
31751 \begin_layout Standard
31752 In your case the package name is
31757 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
31762 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
31763 So you add the command
31766 \begin_layout Standard
31771 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
31774 \begin_layout Standard
31775 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
31779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31780 For more commands provided by the
31784 package, have a look at its documentation,
31785 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31799 \begin_layout Standard
31800 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
31802 For example if you use a
31806 class, you don't need the package
31810 , you can instead write
31813 \begin_layout Standard
31818 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
31823 \begin_layout Standard
31824 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
31825 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
31826 documentation of the document class you want to use.
31833 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
31836 \begin_layout Standard
31837 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
31838 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
31840 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31841 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
31842 Code box as described in the previous
31846 \begin_layout Standard
31847 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
31848 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31851 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31853 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
31860 \begin_layout Standard
31861 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
31867 \begin_layout Standard
31871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31881 \begin_inset Note Note
31884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31885 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
31893 \begin_layout Left Header
31894 \begin_inset Argument 1
31897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31917 \begin_inset Note Note
31920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31921 defines the header line as described below
31929 \begin_layout Center Header
31930 \begin_inset Argument 1
31933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31942 \begin_layout Right Header
31943 \begin_inset Argument 1
31946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31967 \begin_layout Left Footer
31968 \begin_inset Argument 1
31971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31992 \begin_layout Center Footer
31993 \begin_inset Argument 1
31996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32008 \begin_inset Newline newline
32012 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
32018 \begin_layout Right Footer
32019 \begin_inset Argument 1
32022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32044 \begin_layout Section
32045 Customized Page Headers and Footers
32046 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32048 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
32053 \begin_inset Index idx
32056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32057 Document ! Header/Footer line
32063 \begin_inset Index idx
32066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32075 \begin_layout Standard
32076 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
32080 \begin_inset space ~
32091 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32097 \begin_inset space ~
32103 As a second step add in the menu
32105 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32106 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32115 Custom Header/Footerlines
32118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32122 This module offers the following 6
32123 \begin_inset space ~
32129 \begin_layout Description
32131 \begin_inset space ~
32135 \begin_inset space ~
32139 \begin_inset space ~
32143 \begin_inset space ~
32147 \begin_inset space ~
32153 \begin_layout Description
32155 \begin_inset space ~
32159 \begin_inset space ~
32163 \begin_inset space ~
32167 \begin_inset space ~
32171 \begin_inset space ~
32177 \begin_layout Standard
32178 for the different positions in the header/footer.
32179 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
32182 \begin_layout Standard
32183 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
32184 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
32186 \begin_inset space ~
32190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32192 reference "fig:Page-layout"
32196 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
32199 \begin_layout Standard
32200 \begin_inset Float figure
32206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32209 \begin_inset Tabular
32210 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
32211 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
32212 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
32213 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
32214 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
32216 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
32228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32234 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32245 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32263 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32274 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
32277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32278 The normal text on the page goes here.
32279 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
32281 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
32282 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
32287 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32296 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32307 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32325 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32336 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
32348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32354 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32372 \begin_inset Caption Standard
32374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32375 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32377 name "fig:Page-layout"
32381 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
32394 \begin_layout Standard
32395 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32403 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
32407 \begin_inset space ~
32412 is set to “Default”.
32413 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
32422 \begin_layout Subsection
32426 \begin_layout Standard
32427 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
32428 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
32429 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
32430 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
32432 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
32434 Defining the footer line works similarly.
32437 \begin_layout Standard
32438 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
32439 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
32443 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32445 \begin_inset space ~
32453 \begin_layout Description
32456 thepage prints the current page number
32459 \begin_layout Description
32462 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
32465 \begin_layout Description
32468 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
32471 \begin_layout Description
32474 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
32475 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
32478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32482 \begin_inset Quotes prd
32485 because it usually goes in a left header.
32488 \begin_layout Description
32491 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
32492 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
32494 It is normally used in the right header.
32497 \begin_layout Subsection
32498 Default header/footer
32501 \begin_layout Standard
32502 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
32503 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
32504 footer has the page number.
32505 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
32506 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
32507 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
32510 \begin_inset space ~
32518 \begin_layout Subsection
32522 \begin_layout Standard
32523 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
32524 Some pages are different.
32525 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
32526 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
32527 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
32528 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
32529 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
32532 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32533 Header and footer decoration line
32536 \begin_layout Standard
32537 By default, you get a 0.4
32538 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32541 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
32542 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
32554 in the following way:
32557 \begin_layout Standard
32564 headrulewidth}{thickness}
32567 \begin_layout Standard
32568 where thickness is a size in standard units like
32581 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
32582 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32588 \begin_layout Standard
32589 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32591 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
32592 \begin_inset space ~
32596 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32605 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32606 Several header/footer lines
32609 \begin_layout Standard
32610 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
32611 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
32612 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
32614 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32629 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32630 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32632 \begin_inset space ~
32640 \begin_layout Standard
32647 headheight}{height}
32650 \begin_layout Standard
32655 is a size in standard units (e.
32656 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32660 \begin_inset space \space{}
32668 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
32669 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
32670 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32671 logfile with the menu
32673 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32675 \begin_inset space ~
32683 \begin_inset space ~
32688 to see if you can find a warning about the package
32693 \begin_inset Index idx
32696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32698 -packages ! fancyhdr
32704 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
32705 for your header/footer.
32708 \begin_layout Subsection
32712 \begin_layout Standard
32713 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
32714 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
32715 This example consists of the following definition:
32718 \begin_layout Description
32720 \begin_inset space ~
32729 , empty optional argument
32732 \begin_layout Description
32734 \begin_inset space ~
32737 Header empty, empty optional argument
32740 \begin_layout Description
32742 \begin_inset space ~
32751 in the optional argument
32754 \begin_layout Description
32756 \begin_inset space ~
32765 in the optional argument
32768 \begin_layout Description
32770 \begin_inset space ~
32783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32787 \begin_inset Newline newline
32791 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
32795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32798 in the optional argument
32801 \begin_layout Description
32803 \begin_inset space ~
32812 , empty optional argument
32815 \begin_layout Description
32818 headrulewidth set to 2
32819 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32825 \begin_layout Standard
32826 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
32827 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
32833 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32842 \begin_layout Standard
32843 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
32849 \begin_layout Standard
32853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32857 pagestyle{headings}
32863 \begin_inset Note Note
32866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32867 switches back to page style with the default headings
32875 \begin_layout Section
32876 Previewing Snippets of your Document
32877 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32879 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
32884 \begin_inset Index idx
32887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32894 \begin_inset Index idx
32897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32906 \begin_layout Standard
32908 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
32909 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
32910 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
32913 \begin_layout Subsection
32917 \begin_layout Standard
32918 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32924 \begin_inset Index idx
32927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32929 -packages ! preview-latex
32934 (on some systems named simply
32939 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32941 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32947 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32949 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
32957 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
32958 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32959 -package are automatically
32960 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
32964 \begin_layout Subsection
32968 \begin_layout Standard
32969 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
32970 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
32972 activate the option
32975 \begin_inset space ~
32982 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32988 \begin_inset space ~
32992 \begin_inset space ~
32995 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
33002 \begin_inset space ~
33015 \begin_inset space ~
33020 is the multiplication factor for the size.
33023 \begin_layout Standard
33024 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
33029 \begin_inset space ~
33037 \begin_inset space ~
33045 \begin_layout Standard
33046 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
33047 and when you finish
33051 \begin_layout Standard
33052 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33060 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
33061 generated by activating the option
33064 \begin_inset space ~
33070 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
33078 \begin_layout Subsection
33079 Selected document parts
33082 \begin_layout Standard
33083 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
33084 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
33085 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
33086 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
33088 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
33090 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33094 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
33095 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
33096 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
33099 \begin_layout Standard
33100 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33107 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
33112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33119 is explained in section
33121 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
33126 \begin_inset space ~
33136 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
33137 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
33138 the final rotated boxes,
33139 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
33140 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
33142 Here is the result:
33145 \begin_layout Standard
33146 \begin_inset Preview
33148 \begin_layout Standard
33153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33157 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
33163 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
33173 height_special "totalheight"
33178 backgroundcolor "none"
33181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33206 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
33212 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
33219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33234 \begin_layout Standard
33235 Previewing works also for colors.
33236 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33255 is explained in section
33262 \begin_inset space ~
33275 \begin_layout Standard
33276 \begin_inset Preview
33278 \begin_layout Standard
33282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33301 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
33306 This is text within a colored, framed box.
33310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33325 \begin_layout Standard
33326 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
33332 \begin_layout Standard
33333 If \SpecialChar LyX
33334 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
33335 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
33336 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
33337 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33338 packages in your document preamble that are required by
33339 the \SpecialChar TeX
33341 If \SpecialChar LyX
33342 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
33343 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
33345 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
33346 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
33347 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
33350 \begin_layout Subsection
33355 \begin_layout Standard
33356 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33357 source of the whole document or parts of it.
33360 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
33362 \begin_inset space ~
33367 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33369 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
33371 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
33372 's main window, then only this selection
33373 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
33374 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
33375 the source view window.
33380 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
33381 ; but note that if you have
33382 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
33384 not just the one which is open at the time.
33387 \begin_layout Section
33388 Advanced Find and Replace
33389 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33391 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
33396 \begin_inset Index idx
33399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33406 \begin_inset Index idx
33409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33418 \begin_layout Subsection
33422 \begin_layout Standard
33423 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
33424 allows for searching of complex,
33425 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
33427 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
33428 The key-features are:
33431 \begin_layout Itemize
33432 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
33433 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
33434 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
33438 \begin_layout Itemize
33439 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
33440 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
33441 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
33442 a section heading will only be found within section headings
33445 \begin_layout Itemize
33446 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
33447 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
33448 outside of mathematics environments
33451 \begin_layout Itemize
33452 Search may be widened to a specific
33457 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33461 \begin_inset space ~
33464 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
33465 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
33472 \begin_layout Itemize
33473 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
33474 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
33475 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33479 \begin_inset space ~
33482 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
33485 \begin_layout Subsection
33489 \begin_layout Standard
33490 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
33492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
33505 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
33508 ) or the toolbar button
33511 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
33517 Advanced Find and Replace
33522 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33526 \begin_layout Standard
33532 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
33536 \begin_inset space ~
33541 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
33544 arg "paragraph-break"
33548 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
33549 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
33553 arg "paragraph-break"
33556 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
33560 searches backwards.
33563 \begin_layout Standard
33567 \begin_inset space ~
33572 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
33581 \begin_inset space ~
33586 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
33589 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33590 Searching for mathematics
33593 \begin_layout Standard
33594 Mathematical formulas, such as
33595 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
33598 or something more complex like
33599 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
33602 , may be searched for by typing them in the
33607 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
33608 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
33609 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
33610 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
33616 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33620 \begin_layout Standard
33621 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
33622 This is done by switching to the
33626 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
33631 This way, entering in the
33638 \begin_layout Itemize
33639 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
33640 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
33643 \begin_layout Itemize
33644 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
33645 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
33648 \begin_layout Itemize
33649 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
33650 of it only within section headings.
33651 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
33652 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
33656 \begin_layout Itemize
33657 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
33658 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
33661 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33665 \begin_layout Standard
33666 The entries made in the
33670 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
33673 \begin_inset space ~
33679 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
33683 button or alternatively press
33686 arg "paragraph-break"
33693 while the cursor is in the
33696 \begin_inset space ~
33704 \begin_layout Standard
33705 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
33707 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
33711 \begin_layout Itemize
33712 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
33713 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
33714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33721 with its typewriter version
33722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33736 \begin_layout Itemize
33737 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
33739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33743 \begin_inset Formula $R$
33747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33755 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
33759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33762 (you may want to enable the
33765 \begin_inset space ~
33773 \begin_inset space ~
33778 options and disable the
33786 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
33787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33794 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
33795 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
33799 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
33802 , or occurrences of
33803 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
33807 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
33813 \begin_layout Subsection
33817 \begin_layout Standard
33818 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
33822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33823 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
33825 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33827 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
33836 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
33842 This is done with the context menu
33844 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33845 Insert Regular Expression
33847 while the cursor is in the
33852 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
33853 expression matching rules
33857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33858 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
33861 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33865 \begin_inset space ~
33868 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
33869 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
33875 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
33876 same text in the document.
33877 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
33878 Examples of using such a feature may be:
33881 \begin_layout Enumerate
33882 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
33887 editor the fraction
33888 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
33892 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
33895 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
33896 fractions with the given denominator.
33899 \begin_layout Enumerate
33900 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
33912 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
33917 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
33918 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
33919 Also, by inserting a
33920 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
33923 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
33924 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
33927 \begin_layout Standard
33928 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
33929 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
33930 \begin_inset Formula $()$
33933 , and referring back to them through
33934 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
33938 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
33942 For example, try searching with the regexp
33943 \begin_inset Newline newline
33946 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
33949 \begin_inset Newline newline
33952 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
33955 \begin_layout Standard
33956 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
33959 \begin_layout Standard
33960 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33968 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
33969 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
33970 sub-expressions is absolute.
33972 \begin_inset space ~
33976 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
33979 always refers to the first occurrence of
33980 \begin_inset Formula $()$
33983 in all entered regexps.
33991 \begin_layout Section
33993 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33995 name "sec:Spellchecking"
34000 \begin_inset Index idx
34003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34012 \begin_layout Standard
34014 has a built-in spell checker.
34017 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34024 key or the toolbar button
34027 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
34030 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
34031 beginning of the currently selected text.
34032 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
34033 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
34034 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
34035 scrolled so that it is visible.
34036 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
34037 n, if any could be found.
34038 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
34042 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
34043 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
34046 \begin_layout Standard
34047 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
34050 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34054 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
34055 a different one at the top of the dialog.
34057 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
34058 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
34061 \begin_inset space ~
34069 arg "dialog-show character"
34072 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
34074 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
34077 \begin_layout Standard
34078 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34079 can be downloaded from here:
34080 \begin_inset Newline newline
34084 \begin_inset Flex URL
34087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34089 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
34095 \begin_inset Newline newline
34099 \begin_inset space ~
34102 files for each language.
34103 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
34104 \begin_inset space ~
34107 files into \SpecialChar LyX
34108 's installation subfolder
34116 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
34118 \begin_inset Newline newline
34121 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
34122 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
34123 but in most cases these are
34139 is the language code.
34142 \begin_layout Subsection
34146 \begin_layout Standard
34149 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34150 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34152 \begin_inset space ~
34155 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34158 you can set the following things:
34161 \begin_layout Description
34163 \begin_inset space ~
34166 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
34167 should use for spell checking.
34168 Depending on your platform,
34182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34183 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
34184 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
34199 \begin_inset space ~
34202 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
34205 \begin_layout Description
34207 \begin_inset space ~
34210 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
34211 will always use the given language
34212 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
34215 \begin_layout Description
34217 \begin_inset space ~
34220 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
34222 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34226 \begin_inset space \space{}
34230 This should normally not be needed.
34233 \begin_layout Description
34235 \begin_inset space ~
34239 \begin_inset space ~
34242 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
34244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34254 \begin_layout Description
34256 \begin_inset space ~
34259 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
34260 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
34261 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
34262 appear in a context menu.
34263 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
34267 \begin_layout Description
34269 \begin_inset space ~
34273 \begin_inset space ~
34277 \begin_inset space ~
34280 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
34284 \begin_layout Section
34286 \begin_inset Index idx
34289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34296 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34298 name "sec:Thesaurus"
34305 \begin_layout Standard
34307 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
34308 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
34317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34318 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34320 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
34329 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
34331 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
34332 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
34333 which are available for many languages.
34336 \begin_layout Standard
34337 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
34338 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
34342 \begin_layout Subsection
34343 Setting up the thesaurus
34346 \begin_layout Standard
34355 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
34359 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
34364 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
34366 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34370 \begin_inset space ~
34378 For instance, the US English files are named:
34381 \begin_layout Itemize
34385 \begin_layout Itemize
34389 \begin_layout Standard
34398 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
34399 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
34402 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34403 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34404 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
34406 \begin_inset space ~
34411 ) to the path where they are installed.
34415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34416 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
34417 ies, typical locations are
34423 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
34427 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
34431 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
34434 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
34440 LibreOffice-<Version>
34447 On the Mac, the default location is
34449 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
34450 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
34451 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
34452 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
34453 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
34454 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
34462 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
34463 during the \SpecialChar LyX
34464 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
34468 \begin_layout Standard
34469 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
34470 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
34474 \begin_layout Itemize
34475 \begin_inset Flex URL
34478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34480 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
34488 \begin_layout Standard
34489 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
34490 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
34492 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34493 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34494 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
34496 \begin_inset space ~
34501 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
34503 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
34504 and point \SpecialChar LyX
34508 \begin_layout Standard
34509 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
34511 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
34514 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
34520 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
34523 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
34524 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
34526 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34532 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34533 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34534 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
34536 \begin_inset space ~
34541 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
34544 \begin_layout Subsection
34545 Using the thesaurus
34548 \begin_layout Standard
34549 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
34551 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34554 or the toolbar button
34557 arg "thesaurus-entry"
34560 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
34562 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
34564 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
34565 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
34566 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
34575 ), related terms (such as
34578 \begin_inset space ~
34587 ), compounds (such as
34590 \begin_inset space ~
34599 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
34608 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
34611 \begin_layout Standard
34612 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
34613 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
34617 \begin_layout Standard
34618 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
34619 the dictionary, such as the above
34623 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
34624 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34628 \begin_inset space \space{}
34631 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
34632 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
34633 For example, looking up the word form
34637 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
34642 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
34643 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34647 \begin_inset space \space{}
34658 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
34659 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
34660 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
34663 \begin_layout Section
34665 \begin_inset Index idx
34668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34675 \begin_inset Index idx
34678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34679 Document ! Change Tracking
34685 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34687 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
34694 \begin_layout Standard
34695 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
34696 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
34697 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
34698 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
34700 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34702 \begin_inset space ~
34705 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34707 \begin_inset space ~
34715 \begin_layout Standard
34716 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
34730 The color depends on the author that made the change.
34731 You can change the color in
34733 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34734 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34736 \begin_inset space ~
34740 \begin_inset space ~
34745 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34751 \begin_inset Index idx
34754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34755 Color ! Change tracking
34760 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
34761 's status bar when the
34762 cursor is in changed text.
34763 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
34766 arg "changes-merge"
34772 \begin_layout Standard
34773 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
34775 \begin_inset Index idx
34778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34787 \begin_layout Standard
34788 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34794 \begin_layout Standard
34795 \begin_inset Graphics
34796 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
34804 \begin_layout Standard
34805 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34811 \begin_layout Standard
34812 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
34815 \begin_layout Standard
34816 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34822 \begin_layout Standard
34823 \begin_inset Tabular
34824 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
34825 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
34826 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
34827 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
34828 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34837 arg "changes-track"
34845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34851 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34853 \begin_inset space ~
34856 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34858 \begin_inset space ~
34867 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34876 arg "changes-output"
34884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34890 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34892 \begin_inset space ~
34895 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34897 \begin_inset space ~
34901 \begin_inset space ~
34905 \begin_inset space ~
34914 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34935 Jumps to the next change
34941 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34950 arg "change-accept"
34958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34964 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34966 \begin_inset space ~
34969 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34971 \begin_inset space ~
34980 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34989 arg "change-reject"
34997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35003 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35005 \begin_inset space ~
35008 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35010 \begin_inset space ~
35019 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35028 arg "changes-merge"
35036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35042 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35044 \begin_inset space ~
35047 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35049 \begin_inset space ~
35058 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35067 arg "all-changes-accept"
35075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35081 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35083 \begin_inset space ~
35086 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35088 \begin_inset space ~
35092 \begin_inset space ~
35101 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35110 arg "all-changes-reject"
35118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35124 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35126 \begin_inset space ~
35129 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35131 \begin_inset space ~
35135 \begin_inset space ~
35144 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35167 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35168 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
35170 \begin_inset space ~
35179 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35202 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
35204 \begin_inset space ~
35220 \begin_layout Standard
35221 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35227 \begin_layout Standard
35228 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
35248 \begin_layout Standard
35249 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
35250 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
35251 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
35252 the next change after the current cursor position.
35253 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
35254 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
35255 step to the next change.
35256 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
35259 \begin_layout Standard
35260 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
35261 to describe a change.
35264 \begin_layout Standard
35265 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35271 \begin_inset Index idx
35274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35276 -packages ! dvipost
35282 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
35284 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35290 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35294 \begin_layout Section
35295 Comparison of Documents
35296 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35298 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
35303 \begin_inset Index idx
35306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35307 Comparison of documents
35315 \begin_layout Standard
35316 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
35319 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35323 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
35324 file with change tracking enabled showing the
35326 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
35328 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
35332 \begin_inset space ~
35336 \begin_inset space ~
35340 \begin_inset space ~
35349 \begin_inset space ~
35353 \begin_inset space ~
35357 \begin_inset space ~
35361 \begin_inset space ~
35365 \begin_inset space ~
35369 \begin_inset space ~
35374 enables the change tracking option
35377 \begin_inset space ~
35381 \begin_inset space ~
35385 \begin_inset space ~
35390 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
35393 \begin_layout Section
35394 International Support
35395 \begin_inset Index idx
35398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35399 International support
35407 \begin_layout Standard
35408 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
35409 with any language you want.
35410 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
35411 up \SpecialChar LyX
35413 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35415 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
35422 \begin_layout Standard
35423 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
35424 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
35425 \begin_inset space ~
35429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35431 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
35438 \begin_layout Subsection
35440 \begin_inset Index idx
35443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35450 \begin_inset Index idx
35453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35454 Document ! Settings
35460 \begin_inset Index idx
35463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35464 Document ! Language
35472 \begin_layout Standard
35475 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35476 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35479 dialog lets you set
35481 the language, the quote style and character encoding
35486 \begin_layout Standard
35491 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
35496 \begin_inset space ~
35501 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
35502 For details about the different encoding options see section
35503 \begin_inset space ~
35507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35509 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
35516 \begin_layout Subsection
35517 Keyboard mapping configuration
35518 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35520 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
35527 \begin_layout Standard
35528 If you have for example a U.
35529 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35532 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
35533 can use an alternate keymap.
35534 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
35539 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35540 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35541 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
35544 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
35545 \begin_inset space ~
35549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35551 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
35556 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
35557 which one you want to use.
35560 \begin_layout Standard
35561 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
35562 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
35563 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
35564 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35567 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
35568 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
35569 one to support the characters you want.
35570 This and many other customizations are explained in the
35577 \begin_layout Chapter
35580 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35582 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
35589 \begin_layout Standard
35590 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
35591 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
35592 topic inside the user's guide.
35595 \begin_layout Section
35597 \begin_inset Index idx
35600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35609 \begin_layout Standard
35614 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
35617 \begin_layout Subsection
35621 \begin_layout Standard
35622 Creates a new document.
35625 \begin_layout Subsection
35629 \begin_layout Standard
35630 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
35631 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
35632 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
35635 \begin_layout Subsection
35639 \begin_layout Standard
35643 \begin_layout Subsection
35647 \begin_layout Standard
35648 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
35649 Click there on a file to open it.
35652 \begin_layout Subsection
35656 \begin_layout Standard
35657 Closes the current document.
35660 \begin_layout Subsection
35664 \begin_layout Standard
35665 Closes all opened documents.
35668 \begin_layout Subsection
35672 \begin_layout Standard
35673 Saves the actual document.
35676 \begin_layout Subsection
35680 \begin_layout Standard
35681 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
35684 \begin_layout Subsection
35688 \begin_layout Standard
35689 Saves all opened documents.
35692 \begin_layout Subsection
35696 \begin_layout Standard
35697 Reloads the actual document from disk.
35700 \begin_layout Subsection
35704 \begin_layout Standard
35705 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
35706 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
35707 It is described in the section
35709 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
35714 Additional Features
35719 \begin_layout Subsection
35723 \begin_layout Standard
35724 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
35725 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
35727 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
35728 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
35732 \begin_layout Standard
35733 When using the menu entry
35736 \begin_inset space ~
35741 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
35745 \begin_inset space ~
35749 \begin_inset space ~
35753 \begin_inset space ~
35758 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
35759 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
35762 \begin_layout Subsection
35764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35766 name "subsec:Export"
35773 \begin_layout Standard
35774 You can export your document to various file formats.
35775 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
35777 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
35778 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
35779 during its configuration.
35782 \begin_layout Standard
35783 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
35785 \begin_inset space ~
35789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35791 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
35798 \begin_layout Description
35804 \begin_inset space ~
35807 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
35809 \begin_inset space ~
35812 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
35813 \begin_inset Newline newline
35816 Since \SpecialChar LyX
35817 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
35821 \begin_layout Description
35822 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
35828 \begin_layout Description
35830 \begin_inset space ~
35833 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
35839 \begin_layout Description
35840 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
35841 's native DVI-format.
35842 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
35843 files paths or file names in your document.
35845 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
35852 \begin_layout Description
35853 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
35854 in files paths or file names
35857 \begin_layout Description
35859 \begin_inset space ~
35866 ) DVI-format using the program
35868 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35871 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
35875 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35883 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
35891 \begin_layout Description
35893 \begin_inset space ~
35896 (cropped) the same as
35900 but with cropped page margins.
35903 \begin_layout Description
35905 \begin_inset space ~
35908 Dot text file with code in the programming language
35912 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
35917 \begin_layout Description
35921 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35929 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
35937 \begin_layout Description
35939 \begin_inset space ~
35943 \begin_inset space ~
35946 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
35950 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
35958 \begin_layout Description
35962 \begin_inset space ~
35971 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35972 source that is compilable with the program
35974 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35978 \begin_layout Description
35982 \begin_inset space ~
35987 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35988 source, additionally all images used in the document
35989 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
35993 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
35996 \begin_layout Description
36000 \begin_inset space ~
36005 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36006 source code, additionally all images used in the document
36007 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
36015 \begin_layout Description
36019 \begin_inset space ~
36028 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36029 source that is compilable with the program
36035 \begin_layout Description
36037 \begin_inset space ~
36041 \begin_inset space ~
36048 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36049 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
36055 \begin_layout Description
36057 \begin_inset space ~
36060 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
36061 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
36063 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36067 \begin_inset space \space{}
36072 \begin_inset space ~
36076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36091 represent the version number)
36094 \begin_layout Description
36096 \begin_inset space ~
36100 \begin_inset space ~
36103 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
36104 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
36105 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36109 \begin_layout Description
36110 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
36111 's internal XHTML engine
36114 \begin_layout Description
36116 \begin_inset space ~
36120 \begin_inset space ~
36124 \begin_inset space ~
36128 \begin_inset space ~
36131 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
36136 For the conversion the program
36145 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
36148 \begin_layout Description
36149 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
36154 \begin_layout Description
36156 \begin_inset space ~
36159 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
36161 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
36164 For the conversion the program
36173 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
36176 \begin_layout Description
36178 \begin_inset space ~
36181 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
36182 For the conversion the program
36191 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
36194 \begin_layout Description
36196 \begin_inset space ~
36199 (cropped) the same as
36202 \begin_inset space ~
36207 but with cropped page margins
36210 \begin_layout Description
36214 \begin_inset space ~
36219 PDF-format using the program
36223 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
36226 \begin_layout Description
36230 \begin_inset space ~
36234 \begin_inset space ~
36242 \begin_inset space ~
36247 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
36248 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36252 \begin_inset space \space{}
36255 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
36259 \begin_layout Description
36263 \begin_inset space ~
36268 PDF-format using the program
36270 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
36273 , produces PDF-files directly
36276 \begin_layout Description
36280 \begin_inset space ~
36285 PDF-format using the program
36289 , produces PDF-files directly
36292 \begin_layout Description
36296 \begin_inset space ~
36301 PDF-format using the program
36305 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
36308 \begin_layout Description
36312 \begin_inset space ~
36317 PDF-format using the program
36322 , produces PDF-files directly
36325 \begin_layout Description
36329 \begin_inset space ~
36337 \begin_layout Description
36341 \begin_inset space ~
36345 \begin_inset space ~
36350 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
36351 and then exported as text using the program
36356 \begin_layout Description
36361 PostScript format using the program
36369 options see section
36370 \begin_inset space ~
36374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36376 reference "subsec:General-output"
36383 \begin_layout Description
36384 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36385 source and also code in the statistical programming
36399 it is possible to use
36403 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
36407 \begin_layout Standard
36408 If one of the menu entries
36415 \begin_inset space ~
36424 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36426 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
36428 \begin_inset space ~
36432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36434 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
36439 \begin_inset Index idx
36442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36443 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
36452 \begin_layout Subsection
36456 \begin_layout Standard
36457 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
36458 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
36461 \begin_inset space ~
36465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36467 reference "sec:Paths"
36472 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
36481 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
36482 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
36483 's preferences as described in section
36484 \begin_inset space ~
36488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36490 reference "subsec:Converters"
36497 \begin_layout Subsection
36498 New and Close Window
36501 \begin_layout Standard
36502 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
36506 \begin_layout Subsection
36510 \begin_layout Standard
36511 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
36514 \begin_layout Section
36516 \begin_inset Index idx
36519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36528 \begin_layout Subsection
36532 \begin_layout Standard
36533 Described in section
36534 \begin_inset space ~
36538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36540 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
36547 \begin_layout Subsection
36548 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
36551 \begin_layout Standard
36552 Described in section
36553 \begin_inset space ~
36557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36559 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
36566 \begin_layout Subsection
36570 \begin_layout Standard
36571 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
36572 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
36575 \begin_layout Subsection
36579 \begin_layout Standard
36580 Selects the whole document.
36583 \begin_layout Subsection
36584 Find & Replace (Quick)
36587 \begin_layout Standard
36588 Described in section
36589 \begin_inset space ~
36593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36595 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
36602 \begin_layout Subsection
36603 Find & Replace (Advanced)
36606 \begin_layout Standard
36607 Described in section
36608 \begin_inset space ~
36612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36614 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
36621 \begin_layout Subsection
36622 Move Paragraph Up/Down
36625 \begin_layout Standard
36626 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
36630 \begin_layout Subsection
36634 \begin_layout Standard
36635 Described in section
36636 \begin_inset space ~
36640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36642 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
36649 \begin_layout Subsection
36651 \begin_inset Index idx
36654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36655 Paragraph ! Settings
36663 \begin_layout Standard
36664 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
36665 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
36669 \begin_layout Standard
36670 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
36671 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
36677 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36678 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36680 \begin_inset space ~
36688 \begin_layout Subsection
36689 Table and Rows & Columns
36692 \begin_layout Standard
36693 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
36694 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
36695 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
36698 \begin_layout Subsection
36702 \begin_layout Standard
36703 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
36704 It will dissolve this inset.
36705 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
36709 \begin_layout Subsection
36713 \begin_layout Standard
36714 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
36715 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
36718 \begin_layout Subsection
36719 Increase/Decrease List Depth
36722 \begin_layout Standard
36723 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
36725 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
36726 \begin_inset space ~
36730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36732 reference "sec:Nesting"
36737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36739 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
36746 \begin_layout Subsection
36749 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
36752 \begin_layout Standard
36753 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
36754 nts of the same type.
36756 \begin_inset space ~
36760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36762 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
36766 for an explanation.
36769 \begin_layout Section
36771 \begin_inset Index idx
36774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36783 \begin_layout Standard
36784 At the bottom of the
36788 menu the opened documents are listed.
36791 \begin_layout Subsection
36792 Open/Close all Insets
36795 \begin_layout Standard
36796 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
36799 \begin_layout Subsection
36800 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
36803 \begin_layout Standard
36804 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
36807 \begin_layout Standard
36808 Math macros are described in the
36815 \begin_layout Subsection
36819 \begin_layout Standard
36820 Shows the outline window as described in sections
36821 \begin_inset space ~
36825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36827 reference "sec:Navigating"
36832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36834 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
36841 \begin_layout Subsection
36845 \begin_layout Standard
36846 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
36848 \begin_inset space ~
36852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36854 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36861 \begin_layout Subsection
36865 \begin_layout Standard
36866 Opens a window showing console messages.
36867 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
36869 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36872 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
36873 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
36874 is processing the document.
36877 \begin_layout Subsection
36879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36881 name "subsec:Toolbars"
36886 \begin_inset Index idx
36889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36898 \begin_layout Standard
36899 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
36900 All toolbars and the
36903 \begin_inset space ~
36908 can be turned on and off.
36913 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
36925 \begin_inset space ~
36937 \begin_inset space ~
36942 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
36946 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
36953 \begin_layout Standard
36958 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
36962 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
36963 or when a certain feature is enabled.
36964 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
36965 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
36966 is inside a formula or table respectively.
36969 \begin_layout Standard
36971 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
36972 \begin_inset space ~
36976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36978 reference "sec:Toolbars"
36985 \begin_layout Subsection
36989 \begin_layout Standard
36993 \begin_inset space ~
36997 \begin_inset space ~
37001 \begin_inset space ~
37005 \begin_inset space ~
37009 \begin_inset space ~
37013 \begin_inset space ~
37018 will split \SpecialChar LyX
37019 's main window vertically while
37022 \begin_inset space ~
37026 \begin_inset space ~
37030 \begin_inset space ~
37034 \begin_inset space ~
37038 \begin_inset space ~
37042 \begin_inset space ~
37047 will split it horizontally.
37048 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
37049 to view the same document, but at different positions.
37050 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
37051 three or more documents at the same time.
37052 To close a split view, use the menu
37055 \begin_inset space ~
37059 \begin_inset space ~
37067 \begin_layout Subsection
37071 \begin_layout Standard
37072 Closes a split view.
37075 \begin_layout Subsection
37079 \begin_layout Standard
37080 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
37081 so that you will see nothing but your text.
37082 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
37083 's main window fullscreen.
37084 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
37085 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
37088 \begin_layout Section
37090 \begin_inset Index idx
37093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37102 \begin_layout Subsection
37106 \begin_layout Standard
37107 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
37108 \begin_inset space ~
37112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37114 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
37125 \begin_layout Subsection
37127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37129 name "subsec:Special-Character"
37136 \begin_layout Standard
37137 Here you can insert the following characters:
37140 \begin_layout Description
37145 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
37148 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
37149 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37150 -packages you have installed.
37151 You can get a complete display by checking
37154 \begin_inset space ~
37160 \begin_inset Newline newline
37164 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37172 Not all characters will be visible in the
37176 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
37177 dialog (see section
37178 \begin_inset space ~
37182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37184 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
37188 ) can display every character.
37196 \begin_layout Description
37197 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
37201 \begin_layout Description
37203 \begin_inset space ~
37207 \begin_inset space ~
37210 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
37211 \begin_inset space ~
37215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37217 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
37224 \begin_layout Description
37226 \begin_inset space ~
37229 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
37232 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37233 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37239 \begin_layout Description
37241 \begin_inset space ~
37244 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
37247 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37248 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37254 \begin_layout Description
37256 \begin_inset space ~
37259 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
37263 \begin_layout Description
37265 \begin_inset space ~
37268 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
37272 \begin_layout Description
37274 \begin_inset space ~
37277 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
37283 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
37289 \begin_layout Description
37291 \begin_inset space ~
37294 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
37298 \begin_layout Description
37300 \begin_inset space ~
37304 \begin_inset Index idx
37307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37314 \begin_inset Index idx
37317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37318 Language ! Phonetic symbols
37323 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
37324 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
37326 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37332 \begin_inset Index idx
37335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37343 \begin_inset Newline newline
37346 More information about this feature can be found in the
37352 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
37358 \begin_layout Description
37359 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
37361 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
37362 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
37366 \begin_layout Subsection
37370 \begin_layout Standard
37371 Opens a submenu with the following options:
37374 \begin_layout Description
37375 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
37376 \begin_inset script superscript
37378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37387 \begin_layout Description
37388 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
37389 \begin_inset script subscript
37391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37400 \begin_layout Description
37402 \begin_inset space ~
37405 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
37406 \begin_inset space ~
37410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37412 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
37419 \begin_layout Description
37421 \begin_inset space ~
37424 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
37425 \begin_inset space ~
37429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37431 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
37438 \begin_layout Description
37440 \begin_inset space ~
37443 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
37444 \begin_inset space ~
37448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37450 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
37457 \begin_layout Description
37459 \begin_inset space ~
37462 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
37464 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37468 \begin_inset space \space{}
37471 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
37472 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
37478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37481 To insert a fraction use the command
37486 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
37490 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
37496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37499 The visible space is hereby the character before the
37506 \begin_layout Description
37508 \begin_inset space ~
37511 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
37512 \begin_inset space ~
37516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37518 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
37525 \begin_layout Description
37527 \begin_inset space ~
37530 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
37531 \begin_inset space ~
37535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37537 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
37544 \begin_layout Description
37546 \begin_inset space ~
37549 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
37550 \begin_inset space ~
37554 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37556 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
37563 \begin_layout Description
37564 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
37565 \begin_inset space ~
37569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37571 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
37578 \begin_layout Description
37580 \begin_inset space ~
37583 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
37584 \begin_inset space ~
37588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37590 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
37597 \begin_layout Description
37599 \begin_inset space ~
37602 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
37603 \begin_inset space ~
37607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37609 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
37616 \begin_layout Description
37618 \begin_inset space ~
37622 \begin_inset space ~
37625 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
37626 \begin_inset space ~
37630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37632 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
37639 \begin_layout Description
37641 \begin_inset space ~
37644 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
37645 as described in section
37646 \begin_inset space ~
37650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37652 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
37659 \begin_layout Description
37661 \begin_inset space ~
37664 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
37665 \begin_inset space ~
37669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37671 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
37678 \begin_layout Description
37680 \begin_inset space ~
37683 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
37684 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
37686 \begin_inset space ~
37690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37692 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
37699 \begin_layout Description
37701 \begin_inset space ~
37704 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
37705 \begin_inset space ~
37709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37711 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
37718 \begin_layout Description
37720 \begin_inset space ~
37724 \begin_inset space ~
37727 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
37728 \begin_inset space ~
37732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37734 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
37741 \begin_layout Subsection
37745 \begin_layout Standard
37746 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
37750 \begin_inset space ~
37771 are described in section
37772 \begin_inset space ~
37776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37778 reference "sec:toc"
37787 is described in section
37788 \begin_inset space ~
37792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37794 reference "sec:Index"
37802 is described in section
37803 \begin_inset space ~
37807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37809 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
37815 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37818 is described in section
37819 \begin_inset space ~
37823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37825 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
37832 \begin_layout Subsection
37836 \begin_layout Standard
37837 To insert floats, as described in section
37838 \begin_inset space ~
37842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37844 reference "sec:Floats"
37848 and in detail the chapter
37855 \begin_inset space ~
37863 \begin_layout Subsection
37867 \begin_layout Standard
37868 To insert notes, described in section
37869 \begin_inset space ~
37873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37875 reference "sec:Notes"
37882 \begin_layout Subsection
37886 \begin_layout Standard
37887 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
37889 Branches are described in section
37890 \begin_inset space ~
37894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37896 reference "sec:Branches"
37903 \begin_layout Subsection
37907 \begin_layout Standard
37908 Inserts document class-specific insets.
37909 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
37911 An example is the document class
37912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37919 with three custom insets.
37922 Flex insets and InsetLayout
37926 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
37932 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
37935 \begin_layout Subsection
37937 \begin_inset Index idx
37940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37949 \begin_layout Standard
37950 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
37952 For more information see chapter
37954 External Document Parts
37957 \begin_inset space ~
37963 \begin_layout Subsection
37965 \begin_inset Index idx
37968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37977 \begin_layout Standard
37978 Inserts a box in a certain style.
37979 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
37986 \begin_inset space ~
37994 \begin_layout Subsection
37998 \begin_layout Standard
38003 dialog as described in section
38004 \begin_inset space ~
38008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38010 reference "sec:Bibliography"
38017 \begin_layout Subsection
38021 \begin_layout Standard
38026 as described in section
38027 \begin_inset space ~
38031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38033 reference "sec:Cross-References"
38040 \begin_layout Subsection
38044 \begin_layout Standard
38049 as described in section
38050 \begin_inset space ~
38054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38056 reference "sec:Cross-References"
38063 \begin_layout Subsection
38065 \begin_inset Index idx
38068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38075 \begin_inset Index idx
38078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38079 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
38087 \begin_layout Standard
38088 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
38089 Floats are described in section
38090 \begin_inset space ~
38094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38096 reference "sec:Floats"
38100 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
38102 Multi-page Captions
38107 \begin_inset space ~
38115 \begin_layout Subsection
38119 \begin_layout Standard
38120 Inserts an index entry as described in section
38121 \begin_inset space ~
38125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38127 reference "sec:Index"
38134 \begin_layout Subsection
38138 \begin_layout Standard
38139 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
38140 \begin_inset space ~
38144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38146 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
38153 \begin_layout Subsection
38157 \begin_layout Standard
38158 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
38159 Tables are described in section
38160 \begin_inset space ~
38164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38166 reference "sec:Tables"
38170 and in detail in the chapter
38177 \begin_inset space ~
38185 \begin_layout Subsection
38189 \begin_layout Standard
38195 Graphics are described in section
38196 \begin_inset space ~
38200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38202 reference "sec:Graphics"
38209 \begin_layout Subsection
38213 \begin_layout Standard
38214 Inserts a URL as described in section
38215 \begin_inset space ~
38219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38221 reference "subsec:URLs"
38228 \begin_layout Subsection
38232 \begin_layout Standard
38233 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
38234 \begin_inset space ~
38238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38240 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
38247 \begin_layout Subsection
38251 \begin_layout Standard
38252 Inserts a footnote as described in section
38253 \begin_inset space ~
38257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38259 reference "sec:Footnotes"
38266 \begin_layout Subsection
38270 \begin_layout Standard
38271 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
38272 \begin_inset space ~
38276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38278 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
38285 \begin_layout Subsection
38289 \begin_layout Standard
38290 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
38291 title or caption of a float.
38292 Inserts a short title as described in section
38293 \begin_inset space ~
38297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38299 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
38306 \begin_layout Subsection
38311 \begin_layout Standard
38312 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
38313 Code box as described in section
38314 \begin_inset space ~
38318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38320 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
38327 \begin_layout Subsection
38329 \begin_inset Index idx
38332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38341 \begin_layout Standard
38342 Inserts a program listings box.
38343 Program listings are explained in the chapter
38345 Program Code Listings
38350 \begin_inset space ~
38358 \begin_layout Subsection
38362 \begin_layout Standard
38363 Inserts the actual date.
38364 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
38368 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
38376 \begin_inset space ~
38384 \begin_layout Subsection
38388 \begin_layout Standard
38389 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
38390 \begin_inset space ~
38394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38396 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38403 \begin_layout Section
38405 \begin_inset Index idx
38408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38417 \begin_layout Standard
38418 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
38419 \begin_inset space ~
38422 of the current document.
38423 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
38426 \begin_layout Subsection
38430 \begin_layout Standard
38431 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
38432 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
38433 to jump, for example, between section
38434 \begin_inset space ~
38438 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
38439 \begin_inset space ~
38442 2.5 and use the submenu
38445 \begin_inset space ~
38449 \begin_inset space ~
38456 \begin_inset space ~
38462 \begin_inset space ~
38466 \begin_inset space ~
38472 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
38476 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
38482 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
38485 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
38488 \begin_layout Standard
38489 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
38493 \begin_inset space ~
38498 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
38501 \begin_inset space ~
38506 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
38509 \begin_layout Subsection
38510 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
38513 \begin_layout Standard
38514 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
38518 \begin_layout Subsection
38522 \begin_layout Standard
38523 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
38524 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
38525 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
38529 \begin_inset space ~
38533 \begin_inset space ~
38541 \begin_layout Subsection
38545 \begin_layout Standard
38546 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
38549 The \SpecialChar LyX
38550 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
38552 \begin_inset space ~
38560 \begin_inset space ~
38565 manual for a detailed description.
38568 \begin_layout Section
38570 \begin_inset Index idx
38573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38582 \begin_layout Subsection
38586 \begin_layout Standard
38587 Change Tracking is described in section
38588 \begin_inset space ~
38592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38594 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
38601 \begin_layout Subsection
38609 \begin_layout Standard
38610 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
38611 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
38612 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38614 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
38615 to the clipboard or update the view.
38616 \begin_inset Newline newline
38619 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38623 \begin_layout Standard
38626 Open Containing Directory
38628 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
38629 's temporary folder for the document.
38630 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
38631 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
38632 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
38633 For example some journals require to send the
38637 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
38641 \begin_layout Subsection
38642 Start Appendix Here
38645 \begin_layout Standard
38646 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
38647 as described in section
38648 \begin_inset space ~
38652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38654 reference "sec:Appendices"
38661 \begin_layout Subsection
38663 \begin_inset space ~
38669 \begin_layout Standard
38670 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
38671 default output format for the document (menu
38673 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38674 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38675 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
38677 \begin_inset space ~
38681 \begin_inset space ~
38687 \begin_inset space ~
38691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38693 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
38697 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
38700 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38701 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38703 \begin_inset space ~
38706 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38708 \begin_inset space ~
38711 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38713 \begin_inset space ~
38717 \begin_inset space ~
38723 \begin_inset space ~
38727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38729 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38733 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
38734 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
38736 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38737 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38739 \begin_inset space ~
38742 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38744 \begin_inset space ~
38747 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38751 \begin_inset space ~
38755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38757 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38762 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
38763 when it is first configured.
38764 The default output format is
38767 \begin_inset space ~
38775 \begin_layout Subsection
38776 View (Other Formats)
38779 \begin_layout Standard
38780 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
38781 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
38782 actual document with an external program.
38783 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
38784 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38785 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
38787 All possible formats are listed in section
38788 \begin_inset space ~
38792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38794 reference "subsec:Export"
38799 You should at least see the menu entry
38804 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38806 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
38808 \begin_inset space ~
38812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38814 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38819 \begin_inset Index idx
38822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38823 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38832 \begin_layout Standard
38833 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
38834 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
38836 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38837 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38839 \begin_inset space ~
38842 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38844 \begin_inset space ~
38847 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38851 \begin_inset space ~
38855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38857 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38862 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
38863 when it is first configured.
38866 \begin_layout Subsection
38868 \begin_inset space ~
38874 \begin_layout Standard
38875 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
38876 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
38879 \begin_layout Subsection
38880 Update (Other Formats)
38883 \begin_layout Standard
38884 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
38885 your document without opening a new viewer window.
38888 \begin_layout Subsection
38889 View Master Document
38892 \begin_layout Standard
38893 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
38895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38909 \begin_inset space ~
38914 manual for more information on this topic).
38915 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
38916 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
38920 \begin_inset space ~
38924 \begin_inset space ~
38929 generates the output of the whole book, while
38933 will just output the chapter alone.
38936 \begin_layout Standard
38937 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
38938 in the document settings (menu
38940 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38941 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38942 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
38944 \begin_inset space ~
38948 \begin_inset space ~
38954 \begin_inset space ~
38958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38960 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
38964 ) or in the preferences (menu
38966 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38967 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38969 \begin_inset space ~
38972 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38974 \begin_inset space ~
38977 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38979 \begin_inset space ~
38983 \begin_inset space ~
38989 \begin_inset space ~
38993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38995 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39002 \begin_layout Subsection
39003 Update Master Document
39006 \begin_layout Standard
39007 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
39009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39023 \begin_inset space ~
39028 manual for more information on this topic).
39029 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
39030 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
39033 \begin_layout Standard
39034 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
39035 in the document settings (menu
39037 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39038 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39039 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39041 \begin_inset space ~
39045 \begin_inset space ~
39051 \begin_inset space ~
39055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39057 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
39061 ) or in the preferences (menu
39063 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39064 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39066 \begin_inset space ~
39069 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39071 \begin_inset space ~
39074 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39076 \begin_inset space ~
39080 \begin_inset space ~
39086 \begin_inset space ~
39090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39092 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39099 \begin_layout Subsection
39101 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39103 name "subsec:Compressed"
39110 \begin_layout Standard
39111 Un/compresses the current document.
39112 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
39113 compression (see the
39115 Additional Features
39117 manual for details).
39120 \begin_layout Subsection
39124 \begin_layout Standard
39125 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
39128 \begin_layout Subsection
39132 \begin_layout Standard
39133 The document settings are described in appendix
39134 \begin_inset space ~
39138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39140 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
39147 \begin_layout Section
39149 \begin_inset Index idx
39152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39161 \begin_layout Subsection
39165 \begin_layout Standard
39166 Spell checking is explained in section
39167 \begin_inset space ~
39171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39173 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
39180 \begin_layout Subsection
39184 \begin_layout Standard
39185 The thesaurus is described in section
39186 \begin_inset space ~
39190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39192 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
39199 \begin_layout Subsection
39201 \begin_inset Index idx
39204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39211 \begin_inset Index idx
39214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39223 \begin_layout Standard
39224 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
39225 the highlighted document part.
39228 \begin_layout Subsection
39234 \begin_inset Index idx
39237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39238 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
39247 \begin_layout Standard
39248 Generates with the help of the program
39250 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
39253 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
39254 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
39255 This feature is not available on Windows.
39258 \begin_layout Subsection
39264 \begin_inset Index idx
39267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39277 \begin_layout Standard
39278 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39283 \begin_inset space ~
39288 to see the full filename paths.
39291 \begin_layout Subsection
39293 \begin_inset Index idx
39296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39305 \begin_layout Standard
39306 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
39307 files as described in section
39308 \begin_inset space ~
39312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39314 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
39321 \begin_layout Subsection
39323 \begin_inset Index idx
39326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39339 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39357 \begin_inset Index idx
39360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39361 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39370 \begin_layout Standard
39371 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
39372 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
39373 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39374 -packages and programs it needs; see
39376 \begin_inset space ~
39380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39382 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39389 \begin_layout Subsection
39393 \begin_layout Standard
39398 dialog as described in detail in appendix
39399 \begin_inset space ~
39403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39405 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
39412 \begin_layout Section
39414 \begin_inset Index idx
39417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39426 \begin_layout Standard
39427 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
39428 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
39430 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
39434 \begin_layout Standard
39438 \begin_inset space ~
39443 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
39444 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39445 packages and classes found
39446 by \SpecialChar LyX
39448 \begin_inset space ~
39452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39454 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
39461 \begin_layout Standard
39465 \begin_inset space ~
39470 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
39475 \begin_layout Section
39477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39479 name "sec:Toolbars"
39486 \begin_layout Standard
39487 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
39488 \begin_inset space ~
39492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39494 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
39501 \begin_layout Standard
39502 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
39503 This is described in the
39505 Additional Features
39510 \begin_layout Subsection
39512 \begin_inset Index idx
39515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39524 \begin_layout Standard
39525 \begin_inset Graphics
39526 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
39534 \begin_layout Standard
39535 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39541 \begin_layout Standard
39542 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39559 \begin_inset Note Note
39562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39563 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
39568 manual for more information.
39576 \begin_layout Standard
39577 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39583 \begin_layout Standard
39584 \begin_inset Tabular
39585 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
39586 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39587 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
39588 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
39590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39594 \begin_inset Graphics
39595 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
39605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39609 pull-down box for the environments
39622 \begin_layout Standard
39623 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
39629 \begin_layout Standard
39631 \begin_inset Tabular
39632 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
39633 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39634 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39635 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39636 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39659 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39666 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39689 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39696 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39719 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39726 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39735 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
39743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39749 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39756 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39765 arg "spelling-continuously"
39773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39777 Spellcheck continuously
39783 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39806 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39813 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39836 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39843 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39866 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39873 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39896 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39903 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39926 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39933 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39942 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
39950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39956 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39958 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39962 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39966 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39975 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39982 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
39990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39996 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39998 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40002 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40006 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40015 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40024 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
40032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40038 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
40039 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
40046 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40067 Emphasize text, function of the
40069 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40071 \begin_inset space ~
40074 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
40083 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40104 Set text to noun style, function of the
40106 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40108 \begin_inset space ~
40111 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
40120 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40129 arg "textstyle-apply"
40137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40141 Format text using the current settings in the
40143 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40145 \begin_inset space ~
40148 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
40157 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40180 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40181 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
40183 \begin_inset space ~
40192 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40201 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
40209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40215 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40222 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40229 arg "tabular-insert"
40237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40243 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40250 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40259 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
40267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40271 Toggle outline window on/off,
40273 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
40280 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40289 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
40297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40301 Toggle math toolbar on/off
40307 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40316 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
40324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40328 Toggle table toolbar on/off
40341 \begin_layout Subsection
40343 \begin_inset Index idx
40346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40355 \begin_layout Standard
40356 \begin_inset Graphics
40357 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
40365 \begin_layout Standard
40366 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40372 \begin_layout Standard
40373 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40377 \begin_layout Standard
40378 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40384 \begin_layout Standard
40385 \begin_inset Tabular
40386 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
40387 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40388 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40389 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40390 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40417 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40426 arg "layout Enumerate"
40434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40444 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40453 arg "layout Itemize"
40461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40471 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40498 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40507 arg "layout Description"
40515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40525 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40534 arg "depth-increment"
40542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40548 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40550 \begin_inset space ~
40554 \begin_inset space ~
40563 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40572 arg "depth-decrement"
40580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40586 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40588 \begin_inset space ~
40592 \begin_inset space ~
40601 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40610 arg "float-insert figure"
40618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40624 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40625 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
40632 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40641 arg "float-insert table"
40649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40655 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40656 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
40663 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40686 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40693 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40702 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
40710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40716 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40723 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40732 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
40740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40746 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40753 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40776 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40778 \begin_inset space ~
40787 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40796 arg "nomencl-insert"
40804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40810 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40812 \begin_inset space ~
40821 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40830 arg "footnote-insert"
40838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40844 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40851 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40860 arg "marginalnote-insert"
40868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40874 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40876 \begin_inset space ~
40885 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40908 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40909 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
40911 \begin_inset space ~
40920 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40929 arg "box-insert Frameless"
40937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40943 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40950 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40973 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40980 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41003 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41005 \begin_inset space ~
41014 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41023 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
41031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41037 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41038 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41045 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41054 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
41062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41068 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41069 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41071 \begin_inset space ~
41080 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41089 arg "dialog-show character"
41097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41103 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41105 \begin_inset space ~
41108 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41115 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41124 arg "layout-paragraph"
41132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41138 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41140 \begin_inset space ~
41149 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41158 arg "thesaurus-entry"
41166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41172 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41186 \begin_layout Subsection
41187 View/Update Toolbar
41188 \begin_inset Index idx
41191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41192 Toolbar ! View / Update
41200 \begin_layout Standard
41201 \begin_inset Graphics
41202 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
41209 \begin_layout Standard
41210 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41216 \begin_layout Standard
41217 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41221 \begin_layout Standard
41222 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41228 \begin_layout Standard
41229 \begin_inset Tabular
41230 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
41231 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41232 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41233 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41234 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41257 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41264 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41273 arg "buffer-update"
41281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41287 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41294 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41303 arg "master-buffer-view"
41311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41317 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41319 \begin_inset space ~
41328 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41337 arg "master-buffer-update"
41345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41351 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41353 \begin_inset space ~
41357 \begin_inset space ~
41366 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41375 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
41383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41389 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41390 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41391 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41392 Synchronize with Output
41398 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41421 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41422 View (Other Formats)
41428 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41435 arg "update-others"
41443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41449 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41450 Update (Other Formats)
41463 \begin_layout Standard
41464 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
41468 \begin_layout Subsection
41472 \begin_layout Standard
41473 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
41474 \begin_inset space ~
41478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41480 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
41484 , the table toolbar
41485 \begin_inset Index idx
41488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41497 \begin_inset space ~
41502 manual and the math macro toolbar
41503 \begin_inset Index idx
41506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41519 \begin_layout Chapter
41520 The Document Settings
41521 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41523 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
41528 \begin_inset Index idx
41531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41532 Document ! Settings
41540 \begin_layout Standard
41544 \begin_inset space ~
41549 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
41550 is called with the menu
41552 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41556 You can save your document settings as default with the
41558 Save as Document Defaults
41560 button in any dialog.
41561 This will create a template named
41565 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
41566 when you create a new document without
41570 \begin_layout Standard
41575 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
41576 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
41579 \begin_layout Standard
41580 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
41581 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
41582 to find the one you are looking for.
41583 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
41584 the submenus of the dialog.
41586 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41590 \begin_inset space \space{}
41594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41601 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
41602 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
41603 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
41606 \begin_layout Section
41610 \begin_layout Standard
41611 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
41613 Document classes are described in section
41614 \begin_inset space ~
41618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41620 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
41628 \begin_layout Standard
41632 \begin_inset space ~
41637 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
41642 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
41643 as a layout for a document class.
41644 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
41646 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
41655 \begin_layout Standard
41656 Some classes use special class options by default.
41657 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
41661 and you can decide to use them or not.
41662 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
41663 recommended you leave them untouched.
41668 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41669 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
41674 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41676 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
41681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41682 When you want to use one of the following drivers
41683 \begin_inset Newline newline
41688 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
41691 \begin_inset Newline newline
41694 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41695 distribution, see section
41700 \begin_inset CommandInset href
41702 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
41714 \begin_layout Standard
41719 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
41720 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
41721 in the background if the child document
41722 is opened without its master.
41723 This way child documents are always compilable.
41724 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
41731 \begin_inset space ~
41739 \begin_layout Standard
41740 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41751 \begin_inset Index idx
41754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41756 -packages ! prettyref
41762 \begin_inset Index idx
41765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41767 -packages ! refstyle
41772 for cross-references, see section
41773 \begin_inset space ~
41777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41779 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41786 \begin_layout Section
41790 \begin_layout Standard
41791 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
41792 Please refer to the section
41795 \begin_inset space ~
41803 \begin_inset space ~
41808 manual for details.
41811 \begin_layout Section
41815 \begin_layout Standard
41816 Modules are explained in section
41817 \begin_inset space ~
41821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41823 reference "subsec:Modules"
41830 \begin_layout Section
41834 \begin_layout Standard
41836 \begin_inset space ~
41840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41842 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
41849 \begin_layout Section
41853 \begin_layout Standard
41854 The document font settings are described in section
41855 \begin_inset space ~
41859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41861 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
41868 \begin_layout Section
41872 \begin_layout Standard
41873 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
41885 \begin_inset space ~
41890 and whether it should be a
41893 \begin_inset space ~
41898 can also be specified here.
41901 \begin_layout Standard
41902 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
41903 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
41904 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
41906 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
41909 \begin_layout Standard
41912 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
41915 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
41916 justifies the text on screen.
41917 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
41921 \begin_layout Section
41925 \begin_layout Standard
41926 This dialog is described in sections
41927 \begin_inset space ~
41931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41933 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
41938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41940 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
41947 \begin_layout Section
41951 \begin_layout Standard
41952 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
41953 \begin_inset space ~
41957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41959 reference "subsec:Margins"
41966 \begin_layout Section
41968 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41970 name "sec:Language-encodings"
41975 \begin_inset Index idx
41978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41979 Language ! Encoding
41987 \begin_layout Standard
41988 The document language and quote styles are set here.
41989 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
41990 (the \SpecialChar LyX
41992 is always encoded in utf8).
41993 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
41994 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
41995 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
41996 -command is not known for
41997 a particular character).
42000 \begin_layout Standard
42001 If you use the option
42006 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
42007 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
42008 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42010 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
42011 exactly one encoding.
42012 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
42015 \begin_layout Standard
42017 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
42018 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
42019 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42020 installation supports Unicode), choose
42021 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
42022 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
42023 is quite incomplete, so
42024 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
42029 (when \SpecialChar LyX
42030 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
42031 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
42032 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
42033 -commands is not used, because all
42034 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
42035 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
42036 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
42037 , two new alternative engines
42038 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
42040 Both engines support Unicode natively.
42042 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
42045 \begin_inset space ~
42053 \begin_inset space ~
42061 \begin_inset space ~
42067 \begin_inset space ~
42071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42073 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
42078 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
42082 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
42085 \begin_layout Standard
42089 \begin_inset space ~
42094 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42095 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
42097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42105 The possible settings are:
42108 \begin_layout Description
42109 Default uses the language package that is selected in
42111 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42112 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42116 \begin_inset space ~
42120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42122 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
42129 \begin_layout Description
42130 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
42131 format you will use.
42132 In many cases this will be
42137 \begin_inset Index idx
42140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42148 If the newer package
42153 \begin_inset Index idx
42156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42158 -packages ! polyglossia
42163 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
42164 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
42165 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
42167 this package will be used instead of
42174 \begin_layout Description
42176 \begin_inset space ~
42187 would be more appropriate.
42190 \begin_layout Description
42191 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
42192 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
42196 (for German texts), type in
42199 \begin_inset Newline newline
42204 usepackage{ngerman}
42207 \begin_layout Description
42208 None will not use a language package.
42209 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
42212 \begin_layout Standard
42213 Here is a list with the important encodings:
42216 \begin_layout Description
42218 \begin_inset space ~
42222 \begin_inset space ~
42226 \begin_inset space ~
42233 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42239 \begin_inset Index idx
42242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42244 -packages ! inputenc
42250 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
42251 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
42252 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
42256 \begin_layout Description
42257 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
42259 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
42260 commands, which may result in a big
42261 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
42262 -commands are needed.
42265 \begin_layout Description
42267 \begin_inset space ~
42271 \begin_inset space ~
42274 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
42277 \begin_layout Description
42279 \begin_inset space ~
42283 \begin_inset space ~
42286 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
42289 \begin_layout Description
42291 \begin_inset space ~
42294 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
42297 \begin_layout Description
42299 \begin_inset space ~
42303 \begin_inset space ~
42306 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
42307 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
42310 \begin_layout Description
42312 \begin_inset space ~
42316 \begin_inset space ~
42319 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
42323 \begin_layout Description
42325 \begin_inset space ~
42329 \begin_inset space ~
42332 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
42333 ISO-8859-13 encoding
42336 \begin_layout Description
42338 \begin_inset space ~
42342 \begin_inset space ~
42346 \begin_inset space ~
42349 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
42350 \begin_inset space ~
42356 \begin_layout Description
42358 \begin_inset space ~
42362 \begin_inset space ~
42366 \begin_inset space ~
42369 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
42370 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
42373 \begin_layout Description
42375 \begin_inset space ~
42379 \begin_inset space ~
42382 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
42383 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
42384 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42385 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
42386 \begin_inset space ~
42390 \begin_inset space ~
42396 \begin_layout Description
42398 \begin_inset space ~
42402 \begin_inset space ~
42405 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
42406 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
42407 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42409 should try to use the encoding Unicode
42410 \begin_inset space ~
42414 \begin_inset space ~
42420 \begin_layout Description
42422 \begin_inset space ~
42426 \begin_inset space ~
42429 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
42432 \begin_layout Description
42434 \begin_inset space ~
42438 \begin_inset space ~
42441 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
42444 \begin_layout Description
42446 \begin_inset space ~
42450 \begin_inset space ~
42453 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
42456 \begin_layout Description
42458 \begin_inset space ~
42461 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
42464 \begin_layout Description
42466 \begin_inset space ~
42469 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
42472 \begin_layout Description
42474 \begin_inset space ~
42478 \begin_inset space ~
42481 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
42484 \begin_layout Description
42486 \begin_inset space ~
42490 \begin_inset space ~
42496 \begin_layout Description
42498 \begin_inset space ~
42502 \begin_inset space ~
42505 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
42508 \begin_layout Description
42510 \begin_inset space ~
42514 \begin_inset space ~
42520 \begin_layout Description
42522 \begin_inset space ~
42526 \begin_inset space ~
42529 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42535 \begin_inset Index idx
42538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42545 , when using this, set the document language to
42550 \begin_layout Description
42552 \begin_inset space ~
42556 \begin_inset space ~
42559 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42564 , when using this, set the document language to
42567 \begin_inset space ~
42573 \begin_layout Description
42575 \begin_inset space ~
42579 \begin_inset space ~
42582 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42588 \begin_inset Index idx
42591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42593 -packages ! japanese
42598 , when using this, set the document language to
42603 \begin_layout Description
42605 \begin_inset space ~
42609 \begin_inset space ~
42612 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42617 , when using this, set the document language to
42622 \begin_layout Description
42624 \begin_inset space ~
42628 \begin_inset space ~
42631 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42636 , when using this, set the document language to
42641 \begin_layout Description
42643 \begin_inset space ~
42646 (EUC-KR) for Korean
42649 \begin_layout Description
42651 \begin_inset space ~
42655 \begin_inset space ~
42659 \begin_inset space ~
42662 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
42665 \begin_layout Description
42667 \begin_inset space ~
42671 \begin_inset space ~
42675 \begin_inset space ~
42678 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
42679 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
42680 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
42683 \begin_layout Description
42685 \begin_inset space ~
42689 \begin_inset space ~
42695 \begin_layout Description
42697 \begin_inset space ~
42701 \begin_inset space ~
42704 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
42705 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
42708 \begin_layout Description
42710 \begin_inset space ~
42714 \begin_inset space ~
42717 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42723 \begin_inset Index idx
42726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42733 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
42736 \begin_layout Description
42738 \begin_inset space ~
42746 \begin_inset space ~
42749 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
42756 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
42759 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42766 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
42767 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
42769 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
42772 \begin_layout Description
42774 \begin_inset space ~
42778 \begin_inset space ~
42781 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42787 \begin_inset Index idx
42790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42797 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
42800 \begin_layout Description
42802 \begin_inset space ~
42805 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42811 \begin_inset Index idx
42814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42816 -packages ! inputenc
42822 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
42826 \begin_layout Description
42828 \begin_inset space ~
42832 \begin_inset space ~
42836 \begin_inset space ~
42839 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
42840 \begin_inset space ~
42846 \begin_layout Description
42848 \begin_inset space ~
42852 \begin_inset space ~
42856 \begin_inset space ~
42859 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
42860 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
42861 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
42865 \begin_layout Description
42867 \begin_inset space ~
42871 \begin_inset space ~
42875 \begin_inset space ~
42878 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
42879 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
42882 \begin_layout Section
42884 \begin_inset Index idx
42887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42894 \begin_inset Index idx
42897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42904 \begin_inset Index idx
42907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42908 Color ! Shaded boxes
42914 \begin_inset Index idx
42917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42918 Color ! Greyed-out notes
42926 \begin_layout Standard
42927 Here you can alter the font color for the
42931 (default: black), for
42934 \begin_inset space ~
42939 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
42943 (default: white) and for
42946 \begin_inset space ~
42956 sets the color back to the default.
42959 \begin_layout Standard
42960 Clicking any button showing
42968 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
42969 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
42970 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
42971 later more quickly.
42974 \begin_layout Standard
42975 Note, if you change the
42978 \begin_inset space ~
42983 font color and use the option
42986 \begin_inset space ~
42991 in the document settings under
42994 \begin_inset space ~
42999 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
43000 \begin_inset space ~
43004 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43006 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
43013 \begin_layout Standard
43014 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
43020 \begin_layout Standard
43024 \begin_inset space ~
43033 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
43036 \begin_inset space ~
43039 Code after a forced page break:
43042 \begin_layout Itemize
43043 For the page color:
43044 \begin_inset Newline newline
43051 pagecolor{color name}
43054 \begin_layout Itemize
43055 For the text color:
43056 \begin_inset Newline newline
43066 \begin_layout Standard
43067 You are restricted to one of
43103 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
43110 \begin_inset space ~
43116 \begin_inset Newline newline
43119 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
43120 names to refer to them:
43123 \begin_layout Itemize
43129 \begin_inset Newline newline
43134 page_backgroundcolor
43137 \begin_layout Itemize
43141 \begin_inset space ~
43147 \begin_inset Newline newline
43155 \begin_layout Itemize
43159 \begin_inset space ~
43165 \begin_inset Newline newline
43173 \begin_layout Itemize
43177 \begin_inset space ~
43183 \begin_inset Newline newline
43191 \begin_layout Standard
43192 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
43195 \begin_inset space ~
43203 \begin_inset space ~
43211 \begin_layout Section
43215 \begin_layout Standard
43216 Here you can adjust the
43220 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
43224 as described in section
43225 \begin_inset space ~
43229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43231 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
43238 \begin_layout Section
43242 \begin_layout Standard
43243 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43249 \begin_inset Index idx
43252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43264 \begin_inset Index idx
43267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43269 -packages ! jurabib
43277 Sectioned bibliography
43279 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43285 \begin_inset Index idx
43288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43290 -packages ! bibtopic
43295 and you can select a
43299 for the generation of the bibliography.
43300 For a further description see section
43301 \begin_inset space ~
43305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43307 reference "sec:Bibliography"
43314 \begin_layout Section
43318 \begin_layout Standard
43319 Here you can define the
43323 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
43325 \begin_inset space ~
43329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43331 reference "sec:Index"
43338 \begin_layout Section
43342 \begin_layout Standard
43343 The PDF properties are explained in section
43344 \begin_inset space ~
43348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43350 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
43357 \begin_layout Section
43361 \begin_layout Standard
43362 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
43363 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43369 \begin_inset Index idx
43372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43374 -packages ! amsmath
43384 \begin_inset Index idx
43387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43389 -packages ! amssymb
43399 \begin_inset Index idx
43402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43414 \begin_inset Index idx
43417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43429 \begin_inset Index idx
43432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43434 -packages ! mathdots
43444 \begin_inset Index idx
43447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43449 -packages ! mathtools
43459 \begin_inset Index idx
43462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43474 \begin_inset Index idx
43477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43479 -packages ! stackrel
43489 \begin_inset Index idx
43492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43494 -packages ! stmaryrd
43504 \begin_inset Index idx
43507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43509 -packages ! undertilde
43514 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
43517 \begin_layout Description
43518 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
43519 -errors in formulas,
43520 ensure that you have this enabled.
43523 \begin_layout Description
43524 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
43525 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
43526 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
43530 \begin_layout Description
43531 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
43534 \begin_inset space ~
43546 \begin_layout Description
43547 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
43550 \begin_inset space ~
43562 \begin_layout Description
43563 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
43574 \begin_layout Description
43575 mathtools is used for the math commands
43611 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
43618 \begin_layout Description
43619 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
43621 Chemical Symbols and Equations
43630 \begin_layout Description
43631 stackrel is used for the math command
43648 \begin_layout Description
43649 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
43652 \begin_layout Description
43653 undertilde is used for the math command
43661 Accents for one Character
43670 \begin_layout Section
43674 \begin_layout Standard
43675 The float placement options are described in the section
43678 \begin_inset space ~
43686 \begin_inset space ~
43694 \begin_layout Section
43698 \begin_layout Standard
43699 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
43701 Program Code Listings
43706 \begin_inset space ~
43714 \begin_layout Section
43718 \begin_layout Standard
43719 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
43727 set to be used and set the
43732 The itemize environment is described in section
43733 \begin_inset space ~
43737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43739 reference "sec:Itemize"
43746 \begin_layout Standard
43747 You can furthermore specify a
43750 \begin_inset space ~
43755 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43756 command of the desired character.
43757 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
43764 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
43766 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43770 \begin_inset space \space{}
43774 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
43784 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
43785 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
43788 \begin_layout Standard
43789 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43797 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
43798 -packages in the preamble (menu
43801 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43802 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43805 \begin_inset space ~
43811 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
43815 usepackage{textcomp}
43818 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
43822 usepackage{amssymb}
43832 \begin_layout Section
43836 \begin_layout Standard
43837 Branches are described in section
43838 \begin_inset space ~
43842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43844 reference "sec:Branches"
43851 \begin_layout Section
43853 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43855 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
43862 \begin_layout Standard
43863 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
43866 \begin_layout Description
43868 \begin_inset space ~
43872 \begin_inset space ~
43875 Format: The format that is used when you enter
43876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43895 View Master Document
43896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43903 Update Master Document
43904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43911 menu or the toolbar.
43912 The default is set in
43914 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43915 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43917 \begin_inset space ~
43920 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43924 \begin_inset space ~
43928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43930 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43937 \begin_layout Description
43939 \begin_inset space ~
43943 \begin_inset space ~
43946 Output settings for the menu
43948 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43950 \begin_inset space ~
43956 For a detailed description see section
43958 Reverse DVI/PDF search
43963 \begin_inset space ~
43971 \begin_layout Description
43973 \begin_inset space ~
43977 \begin_inset space ~
43980 Options offers settings for the export format
43988 \begin_inset space ~
43993 will assure that the output follows exactly version
43994 \begin_inset space ~
43997 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
44001 \begin_inset space ~
44006 settings are described in detail in section
44008 Math Output in XHTML
44013 \begin_inset space ~
44022 \begin_inset space ~
44026 \begin_inset space ~
44031 is used for the size of equations in the output.
44034 \begin_layout Description
44036 \begin_inset space ~
44041 Save transient properties
44043 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
44044 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
44045 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
44049 \begin_layout Itemize
44050 the activation of change tracking
44053 \begin_layout Itemize
44054 the output of tracked changes
44057 \begin_layout Itemize
44058 the recording of the document directory path.
44061 \begin_layout Standard
44062 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
44063 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
44067 \begin_layout Section
44075 \begin_layout Standard
44076 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44078 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
44080 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44082 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
44086 \begin_layout Standard
44087 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44088 -syntax is given in section
44089 \begin_inset space ~
44093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44095 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
44102 \begin_layout Chapter
44108 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44110 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
44115 \begin_inset Index idx
44118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44127 \begin_layout Standard
44128 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
44130 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44134 It has the following submenus.
44137 \begin_layout Section
44141 \begin_layout Subsection
44145 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44146 User Interface File
44147 \begin_inset Index idx
44150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44151 Customization ! of toolbars
44157 \begin_inset Index idx
44160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44161 Customization ! of menus
44169 \begin_layout Standard
44170 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
44171 interface (ui) file.
44172 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
44180 \begin_layout Description
44185 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
44188 \begin_layout Description
44195 the menu entries in popup context menus
44198 \begin_layout Description
44203 specifies the toolbar buttons
44206 \begin_layout Standard
44207 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
44208 and edit the entries.
44211 \begin_layout Standard
44212 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
44224 entries must be finished with an explicit
44249 and in the case of the
44250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44262 The syntax for the entries is:
44265 \begin_layout Standard
44266 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
44272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44295 \begin_layout Standard
44297 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
44300 All the \SpecialChar LyX
44301 -functions are listed in the menu
44303 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
44305 \begin_inset space ~
44313 \begin_layout Standard
44314 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
44320 \begin_layout Standard
44321 For example, assuming you use the menu
44323 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44326 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
44330 \begin_layout Standard
44331 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
44337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44355 \begin_layout Standard
44357 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
44361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44372 to have the sixth bookmark.
44375 \begin_layout Standard
44379 \begin_inset space ~
44384 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
44385 's toolbar buttons.
44386 The currently available icon sets are compared in
44387 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44390 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
44397 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44401 \begin_layout Standard
44404 Enable tool tips in main work area
44406 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
44410 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44414 \begin_layout Standard
44419 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
44420 should display in the menu
44422 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44424 \begin_inset space ~
44432 \begin_layout Subsection
44436 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44440 \begin_layout Standard
44443 Restore window layouts and geometries
44446 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
44447 the last \SpecialChar LyX
44451 \begin_layout Standard
44454 Restore cursor positions
44456 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
44460 \begin_layout Standard
44463 Load opened files from last session
44465 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
44469 \begin_layout Standard
44472 Clear all session information
44474 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
44475 sessions (cursor positions, names
44476 of last opened documents, etc.).
44479 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44483 name "subsec:Backup documents"
44488 \begin_inset Index idx
44491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44500 \begin_layout Standard
44503 Backup original documents when saving
44505 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
44506 it was saved the last time.
44507 It is stored in the
44510 \begin_inset space ~
44516 \begin_inset space ~
44520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44522 reference "sec:Paths"
44526 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
44529 \begin_inset space ~
44535 The backup file has the file extension
44536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44550 \begin_layout Standard
44553 Backup documents, every
44555 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
44558 \begin_layout Standard
44561 Save documents compressed by default
44563 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
44564 \begin_inset space ~
44568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44570 reference "subsec:Compressed"
44575 This applies to newly created documents only.
44576 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
44579 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44580 Windows & work area
44583 \begin_layout Standard
44586 Open documents in tabs
44588 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
44592 \begin_layout Standard
44597 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
44602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44604 \begin_inset space ~
44608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44610 reference "sec:Paths"
44614 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
44621 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
44622 documents will be opened in the same running instance
44623 of \SpecialChar LyX
44625 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
44626 instance is created for each file.
44629 \begin_layout Standard
44632 Single close-tab button
44634 is checked, there will only be one close button (
44644 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
44645 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
44647 \change_inserted 274215730 1469338548
44648 Regardless of this option, one may always close a tab by middle-clicking
44654 \begin_layout Standard
44655 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44663 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
44664 before the change takes effect.
44672 \begin_layout Standard
44677 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
44679 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
44681 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
44685 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
44686 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
44687 and only want to close the view in once instance.
44690 \begin_layout Subsection
44692 \begin_inset Index idx
44695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44702 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44704 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
44711 \begin_layout Standard
44712 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
44716 \begin_layout Standard
44717 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44725 This section only deals with the fonts
44729 the \SpecialChar LyX
44731 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
44734 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44735 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44746 \begin_layout Standard
44747 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
44764 (depends on the system) as its
44767 \begin_inset space ~
44783 \begin_layout Standard
44784 You can change the font size with the
44791 \begin_layout Standard
44796 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
44798 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44801 points have the size of 1
44802 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44806 \begin_inset space ~
44810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44812 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
44817 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
44818 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44822 The sizes are explained in detail in section
44823 \begin_inset space ~
44827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44829 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
44836 \begin_layout Standard
44839 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
44841 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
44842 needs to redraw the screen less often.
44843 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
44844 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
44845 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
44847 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
44848 \begin_inset space ~
44854 \begin_layout Subsection
44856 \begin_inset Index idx
44859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44860 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
44867 \begin_inset Index idx
44870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44879 \begin_layout Standard
44880 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
44881 by choosing an item in the
44882 list and selecting the
44889 \begin_layout Standard
44890 By checking the option
44894 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
44897 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
44898 \begin_inset space ~
44902 \begin_inset space ~
44907 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
44910 \begin_layout Subsection
44912 \begin_inset Index idx
44915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44924 \begin_layout Standard
44925 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
44929 \begin_layout Standard
44934 enables previewing snippets of your document.
44935 This feature is described in section
44936 \begin_inset space ~
44940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44942 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
44949 \begin_layout Standard
44950 Checking the option
44953 \begin_inset space ~
44957 \begin_inset space ~
44961 \begin_inset space ~
44966 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
44969 \begin_layout Section
44971 \begin_inset Index idx
44974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44983 \begin_layout Subsection
44987 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44991 \begin_layout Standard
44994 Cursor follows scrollbar
44996 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
45000 \begin_layout Standard
45001 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
45002 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
45003 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
45006 \begin_layout Standard
45009 Scroll below end of document
45011 is self-explanatory.
45014 \begin_layout Standard
45015 In \SpecialChar LyX
45016 one can jump from word to word by pressing
45023 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
45025 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
45026 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
45029 \begin_layout Standard
45032 Sort environments alphabetically
45034 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
45037 \begin_layout Standard
45040 Group environments by their category
45042 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
45045 \begin_layout Standard
45050 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
45061 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45065 \begin_layout Standard
45066 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
45071 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
45072 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
45076 \begin_layout Subsection
45078 \begin_inset Index idx
45081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45088 \begin_inset Index idx
45091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45092 Settings ! Shortcuts
45100 \begin_layout Standard
45105 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
45107 Several binding files are available, among them:
45110 \begin_layout Description
45111 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
45114 \begin_layout Description
45115 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
45127 \begin_layout Description
45128 mac.bind a set of bindings for
45131 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45139 \begin_layout Standard
45140 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
45145 , and binding files for special languages.
45146 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
45147 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45151 \begin_inset space \space{}
45155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45163 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
45164 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
45165 will try to use the appropriate binding
45169 \begin_layout Standard
45170 Some binding files, like
45174 , only have a limited scope.
45175 When looking at the end of the file
45179 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
45182 \begin_layout Standard
45186 \begin_inset space ~
45190 \begin_inset space ~
45195 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
45196 in the selected key binding file.
45199 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45201 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45203 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
45208 \begin_inset Index idx
45211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45212 Key Bindings ! Editing
45220 \begin_layout Standard
45221 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
45222 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
45223 functions and the bound shortcuts.
45224 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
45227 Show key-bindings containing
45230 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
45231 Insert there for example as keyword
45232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45239 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
45240 functions that contain
45241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45249 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
45250 All \SpecialChar LyX
45251 functions are also listed in the file
45256 that you will find in the
45263 \begin_layout Standard
45264 For example, to add the shortcut
45272 , select the function and press the
45277 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
45278 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
45281 \begin_layout Standard
45282 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
45283 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
45285 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
45286 function names as a semicolon separated list.
45288 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
45293 \begin_layout Standard
45294 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
45297 \begin_layout Standard
45298 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
45300 The syntax of the entries is:
45303 \begin_layout Standard
45309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45328 \begin_layout Subsection
45330 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45332 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
45337 \begin_inset Index idx
45340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45347 \begin_inset Index idx
45350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45351 Settings ! Keyboard Map
45359 \begin_layout Standard
45360 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
45361 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
45362 provides keyboard maps.
45363 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
45364 is a Romanian one, you can enable
45367 \begin_inset space ~
45371 \begin_inset space ~
45376 and select the keyboard map file named
45383 \begin_layout Standard
45392 keyboard map and, if you use the
45396 bindings, you can select the first and second with
45399 arg "keymap-primary"
45405 arg "keymap-secondary"
45408 respectively or toggle between them with
45411 arg "keymap-toggle"
45417 \begin_layout Standard
45418 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45426 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
45435 \begin_layout Standard
45436 You can also specify the mouse
45438 Wheel scrolling speed
45441 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
45445 Middle mouse button pasting
45447 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
45448 inserts the content of the clipboard.
45451 \begin_layout Standard
45459 \begin_inset space ~
45463 \begin_inset space ~
45468 you can select a key for zooming.
45469 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
45472 \begin_layout Subsection
45476 \begin_layout Standard
45477 Input completion is described in section
45478 \begin_inset space ~
45482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45484 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
45491 \begin_layout Section
45493 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45500 \begin_inset Index idx
45503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45510 \begin_inset Index idx
45513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45522 \begin_layout Standard
45523 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
45524 are normally determined during
45526 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
45529 \begin_layout Description
45531 \begin_inset space ~
45534 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
45535 's working directory.
45536 It is the default when you
45547 \begin_inset space ~
45555 \begin_layout Description
45557 \begin_inset space ~
45560 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
45562 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45564 \begin_inset space ~
45568 \begin_inset space ~
45576 \begin_layout Description
45578 \begin_inset space ~
45581 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
45587 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45591 \begin_inset Newline newline
45595 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45607 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
45608 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
45616 \begin_layout Description
45618 \begin_inset space ~
45622 \begin_inset Index idx
45625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45631 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
45632 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
45633 \begin_inset space ~
45637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45639 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
45647 will be used to save the backups.
45648 \begin_inset Newline newline
45651 Backup files have the ending
45652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45662 \begin_layout Description
45664 \begin_inset space ~
45667 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
45668 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
45670 \begin_inset Newline newline
45677 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
45683 You can edit this file with the program
45692 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
45693 in its preferences under
45696 \begin_inset space ~
45702 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
45707 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
45709 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
45710 in your \SpecialChar LyX
45716 and \SpecialChar LyX
45717 need to be running the same time.
45718 \begin_inset Newline newline
45721 The pipe is also used for the
45725 feature, see section
45726 \begin_inset space ~
45730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45732 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
45737 \begin_inset Newline newline
45740 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
45741 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
45742 \begin_inset Newline newline
45758 \begin_layout Description
45760 \begin_inset space ~
45763 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
45766 \begin_layout Description
45768 \begin_inset space ~
45771 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
45772 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
45773 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
45776 \begin_layout Description
45778 \begin_inset space ~
45781 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
45787 You only need to specify it if you are using
45791 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
45793 For \SpecialChar LyX
45798 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
45802 \begin_layout Description
45804 \begin_inset space ~
45807 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
45808 When \SpecialChar LyX
45809 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
45810 to find it on the system.
45811 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
45813 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
45815 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45819 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45822 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
45823 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
45826 \begin_layout Description
45828 \begin_inset space ~
45831 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
45832 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
45833 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
45834 code or in the document
45836 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
45838 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
45839 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
45840 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
45841 scanned for the input files.
45842 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
45843 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
45845 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
45846 compilation may fail for some documents.
45849 \begin_layout Section
45853 \begin_layout Standard
45854 Here you can insert your
45863 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
45865 \begin_inset space ~
45869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45871 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
45875 , to mark changes you make as yours.
45878 \begin_layout Section
45880 \begin_inset Index idx
45883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45884 Language ! Settings
45890 \begin_inset Index idx
45893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45894 Settings ! Language
45902 \begin_layout Subsection
45904 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45906 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
45913 \begin_layout Description
45915 \begin_inset space ~
45919 \begin_inset space ~
45922 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
45924 You can find its actual translation status here:
45925 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45927 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
45934 \begin_layout Description
45936 \begin_inset space ~
45939 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
45940 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
45941 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
45942 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
45943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45959 The most widespread language package is
45964 \begin_inset Index idx
45967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45974 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
45976 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45977 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45978 come with the alternative
45984 \begin_inset Index idx
45987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45989 -packages ! polyglossia
45994 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
45995 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
46001 The available selections are described in section
46002 \begin_inset space ~
46006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46008 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
46015 \begin_layout Description
46017 \begin_inset space ~
46020 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
46021 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
46022 you can here specify the command to start the package.
46023 An example is the start command
46029 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
46031 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
46035 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46050 selectlanguage{$$lang}
46055 \begin_layout Description
46057 \begin_inset space ~
46065 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
46066 command toggles the package on and off.
46069 \begin_layout Description
46071 \begin_inset space ~
46075 \begin_inset space ~
46078 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
46082 \begin_layout Description
46084 \begin_inset space ~
46088 \begin_inset space ~
46091 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
46095 \begin_layout Description
46097 \begin_inset space ~
46101 \begin_inset space ~
46104 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
46105 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
46106 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
46108 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
46115 \begin_layout Description
46117 \begin_inset space ~
46120 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
46122 When this option is not set, the
46125 \begin_inset space ~
46130 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46132 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
46135 \begin_inset space ~
46143 \begin_layout Description
46145 \begin_inset space ~
46151 \begin_inset space ~
46157 When it is not set, the
46160 \begin_inset space ~
46165 is set to the end of the document.
46168 \begin_layout Description
46170 \begin_inset space ~
46174 \begin_inset space ~
46177 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
46178 language will be underlined in blue.
46181 \begin_layout Description
46183 \begin_inset space ~
46187 \begin_inset space ~
46190 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
46191 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
46194 \begin_layout Description
46196 \begin_inset space ~
46199 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
46200 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
46201 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
46202 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
46205 \begin_layout Subsection
46209 \begin_layout Standard
46210 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
46211 \begin_inset space ~
46215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46217 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
46224 \begin_layout Section
46228 \begin_layout Subsection
46230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46232 name "subsec:General-output"
46239 \begin_layout Description
46241 \begin_inset space ~
46244 search Commands that will be used for the menu
46246 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
46248 \begin_inset space ~
46254 For a detailed description see section
46256 Reverse DVI/PDF search
46261 \begin_inset space ~
46269 \begin_layout Description
46271 \begin_inset space ~
46274 Options Options for the program
46278 that is used for the export format
46283 \begin_inset space ~
46287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46289 reference "subsec:Export"
46294 Possible options are listed in the
46299 \begin_inset Newline newline
46303 \begin_inset Flex URL
46306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46308 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
46318 \begin_layout Description
46320 \begin_inset space ~
46324 \begin_inset space ~
46327 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
46330 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46331 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
46333 \begin_inset space ~
46339 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
46342 \begin_layout Description
46344 \begin_inset space ~
46348 \begin_inset Index idx
46351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46358 \begin_inset Index idx
46361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46362 Settings ! Date format
46367 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
46368 \begin_inset Newline newline
46372 \begin_inset Flex URL
46375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46377 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
46383 \begin_inset Newline newline
46386 For example the format
46387 \begin_inset Newline newline
46391 \begin_inset Newline newline
46394 prints the date as day/month/year.
46397 \begin_layout Description
46399 \begin_inset space ~
46403 \begin_inset space ~
46406 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
46407 is allowed to overwrite on export.
46410 \begin_layout Subsection
46416 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46418 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
46423 \begin_inset Index idx
46426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46427 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
46436 \begin_layout Description
46438 \begin_inset space ~
46446 \begin_inset space ~
46450 \begin_inset space ~
46453 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
46458 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
46479 are used for Cyrillic.
46480 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
46481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46493 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
46495 sets up in the background.
46496 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
46499 \begin_layout Description
46501 \begin_inset space ~
46505 \begin_inset space ~
46509 \begin_inset space ~
46513 \begin_inset space ~
46516 options They only have an effect when the program
46520 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
46523 \begin_layout Standard
46524 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
46525 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
46526 manuals of the applications.
46529 \begin_layout Description
46531 \begin_inset space ~
46534 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
46535 \begin_inset space ~
46539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46541 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
46548 \begin_layout Description
46550 \begin_inset space ~
46553 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
46554 \begin_inset space ~
46558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46560 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
46567 \begin_layout Description
46569 \begin_inset space ~
46572 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
46573 \begin_inset space ~
46577 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46579 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
46586 \begin_layout Description
46592 \begin_inset space ~
46595 command Command for the program
46597 Check\SpecialChar TeX
46600 that is described in the section
46602 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
46607 Additional Features
46612 \begin_layout Standard
46613 There are additionally the following options:
46616 \begin_layout Description
46618 \begin_inset space ~
46622 \begin_inset space ~
46626 \begin_inset space ~
46630 \begin_inset space ~
46635 \begin_inset space ~
46638 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
46639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46656 to separate folders.
46657 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
46659 \begin_inset Index idx
46662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46669 \begin_inset Index idx
46672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46681 \begin_layout Description
46683 \begin_inset space ~
46687 \begin_inset space ~
46691 \begin_inset space ~
46695 \begin_inset space ~
46699 \begin_inset space ~
46703 \begin_inset space ~
46706 changes Removes all manually set
46712 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46713 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46715 \begin_inset space ~
46720 dialog when changing the document class.
46723 \begin_layout Section
46725 \begin_inset space ~
46729 \begin_inset Index idx
46732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46741 \begin_layout Subsection
46743 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46745 name "subsec:Converters"
46750 \begin_inset Index idx
46753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46762 \begin_layout Standard
46763 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
46764 from one format to another.
46765 You can modify converters or create new ones.
46766 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
46773 \begin_inset space ~
46778 field and press the
46783 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
46787 \begin_inset space ~
46792 drop-down list, modify the
46796 field and press the
46803 \begin_layout Standard
46806 Converter File Cache
46812 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
46814 Maximum Age (in days
46817 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
46818 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
46821 \begin_layout Standard
46822 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
46823 definition, is described in the section
46834 \begin_layout Subsection
46836 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46838 name "sec:File-Formats"
46843 \begin_inset Index idx
46846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46853 \begin_inset Index idx
46856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46865 \begin_layout Standard
46866 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
46876 programs that should be used for certain formats.
46879 \begin_layout Standard
46880 You can also define the
46882 Default output format
46884 that is used when you use
46886 View, Update, View Master Document
46890 Update Master Document
46896 menu or the toolbar.
46899 \begin_layout Standard
46900 More about formats and their options is described in the section
46911 \begin_layout Standard
46912 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
46914 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
46915 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
46916 This is done by specifying a
46921 More about this is described in the section
46932 \begin_layout Chapter
46933 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
46935 \begin_inset Index idx
46938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46945 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46947 name "chap:Units-available-in"
46954 \begin_layout Standard
46956 \begin_inset space ~
46960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46962 reference "tab:Units"
46966 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
46967 and used in this documentation.
46970 \begin_layout Standard
46971 \begin_inset Float table
46977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46978 \begin_inset Caption Standard
46980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46981 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46996 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
47002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47004 \begin_inset Tabular
47005 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
47006 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
47007 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
47008 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
47009 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
47011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47142 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47146 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47215 scaled point (65536
47216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47220 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47294 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
47298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47335 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47367 % of original image width
47372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47649 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47653 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47683 \begin_layout Chapter
47685 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47687 name "chap:Credits"
47694 \begin_layout Standard
47695 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
47696 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
47699 \begin_layout Itemize
47702 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
47705 \begin_layout Itemize
47711 \begin_layout Itemize
47717 \begin_layout Itemize
47723 \begin_layout Itemize
47729 \begin_layout Itemize
47735 \begin_layout Itemize
47741 \begin_layout Itemize
47747 \begin_layout Itemize
47750 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
47753 \begin_layout Itemize
47759 \begin_layout Itemize
47765 \begin_layout Itemize
47771 \begin_layout Itemize
47777 \begin_layout Itemize
47783 \begin_layout Itemize
47789 \begin_layout Itemize
47795 \begin_layout Itemize
47801 \begin_layout Itemize
47802 The \SpecialChar LyX
47804 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47813 \begin_layout Standard
47814 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47817 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
47824 \begin_layout Bibliography
47825 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47826 LatexCommand bibitem
47832 The \SpecialChar LyX
47834 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47837 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
47842 \begin_inset Newline newline
47846 \begin_inset Flex URL
47849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47851 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
47859 \begin_layout Bibliography
47860 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47861 LatexCommand bibitem
47862 key "latexcompanion"
47866 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
47868 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
47869 Companion Second Edition.
47872 Addison-Wesley, 2004
47875 \begin_layout Bibliography
47876 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47877 LatexCommand bibitem
47882 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
47885 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
47889 Addison-Wesley, 2003
47892 \begin_layout Bibliography
47893 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47894 LatexCommand bibitem
47902 : A Document Preparation System.
47905 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
47908 \begin_layout Bibliography
47909 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47910 LatexCommand bibitem
47919 The \SpecialChar TeX
47923 Addison-Wesley, 1984
47926 \begin_layout Bibliography
47927 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47928 LatexCommand bibitem
47933 The \SpecialChar TeX
47935 \begin_inset Newline newline
47939 \begin_inset Flex URL
47942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47944 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
47952 \begin_layout Bibliography
47953 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47954 LatexCommand bibitem
47959 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
47961 \begin_inset Newline newline
47965 \begin_inset Flex URL
47968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47970 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
47978 \begin_layout Bibliography
47979 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47980 LatexCommand bibitem
47986 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47988 name "Documentation"
47989 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
47995 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47999 \begin_inset Newline newline
48003 \begin_inset Flex URL
48006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48008 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
48016 \begin_layout Bibliography
48017 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48018 LatexCommand bibitem
48024 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48026 name "Documentation"
48027 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
48031 how to use the program
48033 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48037 \begin_inset Newline newline
48041 \begin_inset Flex URL
48044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48046 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
48054 \begin_layout Bibliography
48055 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48056 LatexCommand bibitem
48062 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48064 name "Documentation"
48065 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
48074 \begin_inset Newline newline
48078 \begin_inset Flex URL
48081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48083 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
48091 \begin_layout Bibliography
48092 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48093 LatexCommand bibitem
48094 key "makeindex-man"
48099 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48102 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
48111 \begin_inset Newline newline
48115 \begin_inset Flex URL
48118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48120 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
48128 \begin_layout Bibliography
48129 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48130 LatexCommand bibitem
48136 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48138 name "Documentation"
48139 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
48148 \begin_inset Newline newline
48152 \begin_inset Flex URL
48155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48157 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
48165 \begin_layout Bibliography
48166 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48167 LatexCommand bibitem
48173 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48175 name "Documentation"
48176 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
48180 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
48182 \begin_inset Newline newline
48186 \begin_inset Flex URL
48189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48191 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
48199 \begin_layout Bibliography
48200 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48201 LatexCommand bibitem
48207 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48209 name "Documentation"
48210 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
48214 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48220 \begin_inset Index idx
48223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48225 -packages ! caption
48231 \begin_inset Newline newline
48235 \begin_inset Flex URL
48238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48240 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
48248 \begin_layout Bibliography
48249 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48250 LatexCommand bibitem
48256 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48258 name "Documentation"
48259 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
48263 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48269 \begin_inset Index idx
48272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48274 -packages ! enumitem
48280 \begin_inset Newline newline
48284 \begin_inset Flex URL
48287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48289 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
48297 \begin_layout Bibliography
48298 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48299 LatexCommand bibitem
48305 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48307 name "Documentation"
48308 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
48312 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48318 \begin_inset Index idx
48321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48323 -packages ! fancyhdr
48329 \begin_inset Newline newline
48333 \begin_inset Flex URL
48336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48338 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
48346 \begin_layout Bibliography
48347 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48348 LatexCommand bibitem
48354 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48356 name "Documentation"
48357 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
48361 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48367 \begin_inset Index idx
48370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48372 -packages ! hyperref
48378 \begin_inset Newline newline
48382 \begin_inset Flex URL
48385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48387 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
48395 \begin_layout Bibliography
48396 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48397 LatexCommand bibitem
48403 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48405 name "Documentation"
48406 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
48410 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48416 \begin_inset Index idx
48419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48421 -packages ! nomencl
48427 \begin_inset Newline newline
48431 \begin_inset Flex URL
48434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48436 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
48444 \begin_layout Bibliography
48445 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48446 LatexCommand bibitem
48452 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48454 name "Documentation"
48455 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
48459 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48465 \begin_inset Index idx
48468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48470 -packages ! prettyref
48476 \begin_inset Newline newline
48480 \begin_inset Flex URL
48483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48485 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
48493 \begin_layout Bibliography
48494 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48495 LatexCommand bibitem
48501 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48503 name "Documentation"
48504 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
48508 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48514 \begin_inset Index idx
48517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48519 -packages ! refstyle
48525 \begin_inset Newline newline
48529 \begin_inset Flex URL
48532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48534 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
48542 \begin_layout Bibliography
48543 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48544 LatexCommand bibitem
48550 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48553 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
48557 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48559 \begin_inset Newline newline
48563 \begin_inset Flex URL
48566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48568 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
48576 \begin_layout Bibliography
48577 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48578 LatexCommand bibitem
48584 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48587 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
48591 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48593 \begin_inset Newline newline
48597 \begin_inset Flex URL
48600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48602 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
48610 \begin_layout Bibliography
48611 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48612 LatexCommand bibitem
48618 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48621 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
48625 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48626 for Cyrillic languages:
48627 \begin_inset Newline newline
48631 \begin_inset Flex URL
48634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48636 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
48644 \begin_layout Bibliography
48645 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48646 LatexCommand bibitem
48652 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48655 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
48659 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48661 \begin_inset Newline newline
48665 \begin_inset Flex URL
48668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48670 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
48678 \begin_layout Bibliography
48679 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48680 LatexCommand bibitem
48686 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48689 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
48693 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48695 \begin_inset Newline newline
48699 \begin_inset Flex URL
48702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48704 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
48712 \begin_layout Bibliography
48713 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48714 LatexCommand bibitem
48720 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48723 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
48727 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48729 \begin_inset Newline newline
48733 \begin_inset Flex URL
48736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48738 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
48746 \begin_layout Bibliography
48747 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48748 LatexCommand bibitem
48754 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48757 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
48761 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48763 \begin_inset Newline newline
48767 \begin_inset Flex URL
48770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48772 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
48780 \begin_layout Bibliography
48781 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48782 LatexCommand bibitem
48788 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48791 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
48795 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48797 \begin_inset Newline newline
48801 \begin_inset Flex URL
48804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48806 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
48814 \begin_layout Bibliography
48815 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48816 LatexCommand bibitem
48822 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48825 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
48829 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48831 \begin_inset Newline newline
48835 \begin_inset Flex URL
48838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48840 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
48848 \begin_layout Bibliography
48849 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48850 LatexCommand bibitem
48856 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48859 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
48863 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48865 \begin_inset Newline newline
48869 \begin_inset Flex URL
48872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48874 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
48882 \begin_layout Bibliography
48883 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48884 LatexCommand bibitem
48890 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48893 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
48897 about new features in
48903 \begin_inset Newline newline
48907 \begin_inset Flex URL
48910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48912 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
48920 \begin_layout Standard
48921 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
48928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48955 \begin_inset Note Note
48958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48965 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
48966 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
48967 bibliography is the second one:
48975 \begin_layout Standard
48976 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
48977 LatexCommand bibtex
48978 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
48979 options "biblio/alphadin"
48986 \begin_layout Standard
48987 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48991 \begin_layout Standard
48992 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
48993 LatexCommand printnomenclature
48999 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
49000 LatexCommand printindex